31010794-VRP1.5 Command Reference Volume 1

HUAWEI
1. Fundamental Configuration 2. Interface Configuration 3. Link Layer Protocol Configuration 4. Network Protocol Configuration
VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1
V200R001
VRP User Manual Command Reference

Volume Manual Version 1 T2-080194-20011213-C-1.5
Product Version V200R001 BOM 31010794
Copyright 2001 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, , M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Although every effort has been made to make this document as accurate, complete, and clear as possible, Huawei Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Zip code: Tel: Fax: Website: E-mail: Huawei Customer Service Building, Kefa Road, Science-based Industrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 +86-755-6540036 +86-755-6540035 http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
About This Manual

Contents
To help readers to better understand, use and maintain Quidway series routers, we publish the manual suit of Quidway series routers. This manual suit includes: VRP User Manual VRP User Manual VRP User Manual VRP User Manual VRP User Manual VRP User Manual Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 1 Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 2 Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 3 Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 1 Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 2 Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 3
Quidway R1602 Router Installation Manual Quidway R1603/1604 Routers Installation Manual Quidway R2501 Router Installation Manual Quidway R2501E Router Installation Manual Quidway R2509/2511 Routers Installation Manual Quidway R2509E/2511E Routers Installation Manual Quidway R4001 Router Installation Manual Quidway R4001E Router Installation Manual Quidway R26/36 Modular Router Installation Manual Among the manual suit, the first two manuals are applicable to all routers, and the other installation manuals are separately used for their own types of routers. In VRP User Manual as follows: Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 1, the modules are arranged
Module 1 Fundamental Configuration (01FC). This module mainly introduces the fundamental configuration commands of Quidway series routers software platform VRP1.5, including EXEC interface commands, system management commands, terminal service configuration commands, SNMP configuration commands and maintenance and debug tool commands. Module 2 Interface Configuration (02IC). This module introduces in detail the interface configuration commands of Quidway series routers, including Ethernet interface configuration commands, asynchronous serial port configuration commands, synchronous serial port configuration commands, ISDN BRI interface configuration commands, cE1/PRI interface configuration commands. Because Dialer configuration commands, sub-interface configuration commands, logic channel configuration commands of backup center and virtual interface template configuration commands are related to specific performance configurations of the following modules, they are not listed here. Module 3 Link Layer Protocol Configuration (03LLC). This module introduces in detail WAN protocol configuration commands supported by VRP1.5, including configuration commands of PPP, MP, SLIP, LAPB, X.25, X.25 Switch,
Frame Relay, ISDN and HDLC, etc. Because the configuration commands of SDLC are closely related to those of SNA/DLSw, they are incorporated to chapter DLSw Configuration Commands in Network Protocol Configuration. Module 4 Network Protocol Configuration (04NC). This module introduces mainly network protocol configuration commands, including configuration commands of IP address, IP performance, network address translation (NAT), IPX, VLAN and DLSw.
Note: For questions regarding the product specifications, please confirm with the concerned personnel in Huawei's Enterprise Network Section as the software specifications are varied with the product of different type.
Target Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers: Network engineers Technical assistance engineers Network administrators
Conventions Used in the Document
Keyboard operation
Format <Key > <Key 1 + Key 2> <Key 1, Key 2> [Menu Option] Description Press the key with key name expressed with a pointed bracket, e.g. <Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A >. Press the keys concurrently; e.g. <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn, e.g. <Alt, A> means the two keys should be pressed in turn. The item with a square bracket indicates the menu option, e.g. [System] option on the main menu. The item with a pointed bracket indicates the functional button option, e.g. <OK> button on some interface. Multi-level menu options, e.g. [System/Option/Color setup] on the main menu indicates [Color Setup] on the menu option of [Option], which is on the menu option of [System].
[Menu 1/Menu 2/Menu 3]
Mouse operation
Action Click Double Click Drag
Description Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default). Press the left button twice continuously and quickly. Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
Symbol
Some distinct symbols are employed in the manual to indicate the special notice that should be taken for the operation. The symbols are: Caution, Notice, Warning, Danger: Notify the special attention that should be given to the operation. Note, Prompt, Tip, Thought: Give further necessary supplement or explanation for the operation description.
HUAWEI
VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1 01 Fundamental Configuration (FC)
User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 EXEC Interface Commands ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 configure ........................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 controller e1 ...................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 crypto ................................................................................................................................ 1-2 1.4 disable............................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.5 enable ............................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.6 exit .................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.7 help ................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.8 interface ............................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.9 language ........................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.10 logic-channel................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.11 route-map........................................................................................................................ 1-8 1.12 router............................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.13 vpdn-group...................................................................................................................... 1-9 1.14 show history .................................................................................................................. 1-10 Chapter 2 System Management Commands ............................................................................. 2-1 2.1 File Management Commands........................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 configfile ................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 copy........................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.3 download config ..................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.4 erase ...................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5 first-config............................................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.6 get .......................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.7 write........................................................................................................................ 2-8 2.1.8 show configfile........................................................................................................ 2-8 2.1.9 show running-config ............................................................................................... 2-9 2.1.10 show startup-config ............................................................................................ 2-10 2.2 FTP Server Configuration Commands ........................................................................... 2-10 2.2.1 ftp-server config-name ......................................................................................... 2-11 2.2.2 ftp-server enable .................................................................................................. 2-11 2.2.3 ftp-server system-name ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.2.4 ftp-server timeout ................................................................................................. 2-12 2.2.5 show ftp-server.................................................................................................... 2-13 2.3 Basic System Management Commands ........................................................................ 2-13 2.3.1 clock set ............................................................................................................... 2-13 2.3.2 hostname.............................................................................................................. 2-14 2.3.3 reboot ................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.3.4 setup..................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.3.5 show clock............................................................................................................ 2-17 2.3.6 show hostname .................................................................................................... 2-18 2.3.7 show queueing ..................................................................................................... 2-18 2.3.8 show version ........................................................................................................ 2-19 Chapter 3 Terminal Service Configuration Commands............................................................ 3-1 3.1 Terminal Service Attribute Configuration Commands ...................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 exec-timeout........................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Telnet Service Configuration Commands......................................................................... 3-1 3.2.1 terminal telnet refuse-negotiation........................................................................... 3-1 3.2.2 telnet....................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.3 show client.............................................................................................................. 3-3 3.3 Terminal Server Configuration Commands ...................................................................... 3-3 3.3.1 async mode tty ....................................................................................................... 3-4
i
Table of Contents
3.3.2 autocommand ........................................................................................................ 3-4 3.3.3 tty logo-print............................................................................................................ 3-5 3.3.4 tty menu-key........................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.5 tty-server app ......................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.6 tty-server enable..................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.7 tty-server source-ip ................................................................................................ 3-8 3.3.8 tty test-key .............................................................................................................. 3-9 3.3.9 show tty .................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.3.10 show tty-server ................................................................................................... 3-10 3.4 PRI Terminal Configuration Commands......................................................................... 3-10 3.4.1 pri-interactive........................................................................................................ 3-11 3.4.2 pri-autocommand ................................................................................................. 3-11 3.5 X.25 PAD configuration commands................................................................................ 3-12 3.5.1 login pad............................................................................................................... 3-12 3.5.2 pad ....................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.5.3 x29 inviteclear-time .............................................................................................. 3-14 3.5.4 show x25 pad ....................................................................................................... 3-14 3.5.5 debug pad ............................................................................................................ 3-15 3.6 Rlogin configuration command ....................................................................................... 3-16 3.6.1 rlogin..................................................................................................................... 3-16 Chapter 4 SNMP Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 4-1 4.1 SNMP Configuration Commands...................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 snmp-server community......................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 snmp-server contact............................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 snmp-server enable traps ...................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.4 snmp-server host ................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.5 snmp-server location.............................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.6 snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1............................................................... 4-4 4.1.7 show snmp ............................................................................................................. 4-5 4.2 RMON configuration command ........................................................................................ 4-6 4.2.1 rmon promiscuous................................................................................................. 4-6 4.2.2 clear rmon statistics ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.3 show rmon statistics............................................................................................... 4-7 Chapter 5 Maintenance and Debugging Tool Commands ....................................................... 5-1 5.1 System Debugging Commands ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 debug ..................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 show debugging ..................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2 Network Test Tool Commands ......................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 ping......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.2 ping ipx ................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.3 tracert ..................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Log Commands ................................................................................................................ 5-7 5.3.1 logging on............................................................................................................... 5-7 5.3.2 logging console ...................................................................................................... 5-8 5.3.3 logging buffered ..................................................................................................... 5-9 5.3.4 logging monitor....................................................................................................... 5-9 5.3.5 logging host .......................................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.6 show logging ........................................................................................................ 5-11
ii
Chapter 1
EXEC Interface Commands
Chapter 1 EXEC Interface Commands

EXEC interface commands include: configure controller e1 crypto disable enable exit help interface language logic-channel route-map router show history vpdn-group
1.1 configure
Use the configure command to enter the global configuration mode from the privileged user mode. configure
Command Mode
Privileged user mode
Example
! Enter the global configuration mode. Quidway#configure ! Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with command exit. Quidway(config)#
Related Command
exit
1.2 controller e1
Use the controller e1 command to enter the cE1/PRI interface configuration mode from the global configuration mode. controller e1 number
1-1
Chapter 1
Syntax Description
number Interface number of cE1/PRI, increasing from 0 in order.
Command Mode
Global configuration mode
Example
! Enter the cE1/PRI interface configuration mode. Quidway(config)# controller e1 0 Quidway(config-if-E0)#
Related Command
exit
1.3 crypto
Use the crypto command to create and enter the corresponding security configuration. Use the no form of this command to delete the corresponding security configuration. crypto { ike key | ipsec transform | map } no crypto { ike key | ipsec transform | map }
Syntax Description
ike policy IKE policy configuration. ipsec transform IPSec transform configuration. map Map configuration.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The crypto configuration command is used to create and enter the corresponding encryption configuration. For its specific use and parameters, consult the reference for the IKE and IPSec configuration commands.
Example
Example 1: ! Enter the configuration for IKE policy 10. Quidway(config)#crypto ike policy 10 Quidway(config-crypto-ike-policy-10)# Example 2:
1-2
Chapter 1
! Enter the map configuration whose name is newmap1 and sequence number is 100, and that negotiates via isakmp.
Quidway(config)#crypto map newmap1 100 isakmp
Quidway(config-crypto-map-map1-100)# Example 3: ! Enter the IPSec transform-set configuration whose name is newtrans1. Quidway(config)# crypto ipsec transform newtrans1 Quidway(config-crypto-transform-newtrans1)#
Related Command
exit
1.4 disable
Use the disable command to return from the privileged user mode to user mode. disable
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When a privileged user is to be away from the terminal for a long time, he should execute the disable command to restore user mode, or execute the exit command to exit so as to prevent unauthorized access. For the same reason, if you have not made any input from the keyboard in 10 minutes, the system will automatically disconnect with you.
Example
! Return from the privileged user mode to user mode. Quidway#disable Quidway>
Related Command
enable, exit
1.5 enable
Use the enable command to enter the privileged user mode from the user mode. enable
1-3
Chapter 1
Command Mode
User mode
Usage Guideline
To prevent unauthorized access, it is necessary to authenticate the user before he enters the privileged user mode from the user mode, that is, he needs to enter the privileged user password. In order to prevent the password input by you from being displayed on the screen for sake of security, if you input the correct password in three attempts, you will enter the privileged user mode; otherwise the original command mode will remain unchanged.
Example
! Enter the privileged user mode from the user mode. Quidway>enable
Password:
Quidway#
Related Command
disable, enable password, exit
1.6 exit
Use the exit command to return to a lower-level mode from the current mode. If you are in user mode and privileged user mode, then you would exit the configuration. exit
Command Mode
User mode, privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode, virtual interface configuration mode, VPDN group configuration mode, etc.
Usage Guideline
There are four levels of command mode, which respectively are, from low to high: User mode, Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode, virtual interface configuration mode, and VPDN configuration mode. By executing the exit command, you can return to a lower-level user mode from a higher-level command mode. Switching is allowed between configuration modes of the same level. In addition, you can directly return to the privileged user mode from two higher-level command modes.
Example
! Return from the Ethernet Interface configuration mode to the global configuration mode.
1-4
Chapter 1
Quidway(config-if-ethernet0)# exit Quidway(config)#
Related Command
configure, router, interface, controller, logical-channel, vpdn-group, router-map
1.7 help
Use the help command to show the help information. help
Command Mode
User mode, privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode, virtual interface configuration mode, VPDN group configuration mode, etc.
Usage Guideline
VRP1.4 provides online help at any point. And the help command shows the information about the whole help system, including full help and partial help. You can enter a question mark ? to obtain online help.
Example
Quidway(config)# help
Help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty. Two styles of help are provided: 1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument ( e.g. 'show ?' ) and describes each possible argument. 2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input ( e.g. 'show sn?' ).
1.8 interface
Use the interface command to create/enter the interface configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete some customized logic interfaces (Dialer, Virtualtemplate, etc.) and sub-interfaces. interface { { async | ethernet | serial | bri | dialer | tunnel | virtual-template | vpntunnel } interface-number | interface-name } no interface { { async | ethernet | serial | bri | dialer | tunnel | virtual-template | vpntunnel } interface-number | interface-name }
Syntax Description
1) Interface type VRP1.4 now supports the following types:
1-5
Chapter 1
Async Ethernet serial bri dialer tunnel virtual-template vpntunnel Async, Ethernet, serial and bri are all physical interfaces, and dialer, tunnel, virtual-template, and vpntunnel are logic interfaces. Serial interfaces include async serial interfaces, sync serial interfaces, and cE1/PRI interfaces (channel-group and pri-group). Some of the physical interfaces support sub-interfaces. 2) Interface-number The above five types are numbered respectively, each beginning from 0: On different models of routers, physical routers have their own numbers. As for the channel-group cE1/PRI interface, its number is e1-interface-number : channel-groupnumber; As for the pri-group cE1/PRI interface, its number is e1-interface-number : 15; As for other logic interfaces like Dialer or Virtual-template, they are numbered based on the order where they have been created; As for a sub-interface, its number is physical-interface-number. Sub-interfacenumber. 3) Interface-name After learning the interface numbering rules, you can know interface naming. The format for an interface name: interface type plus interface number. For example, Ethernet0 stands for Ethernet interface number 0; Serial0.1 stands for sub-interface number 1 of Serial0; Serial3: 2 stands for channel-group 2 in cE1/PRI interface 3. To make input easy for you, interface types can be abbreviated (only a few beginning letters are used abbreviations as long as they do not conflict with other interface types), for example, Ethernet0 can be abbreviated as e0, and Serial0.1 can be abbreviated as s0.1.
Command Mode
Global configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode, virtual interface configuration mode, VPDN group configuration mode, etc.
Usage Guideline
The interface command can be executed to enter the physical interface configuration mode, or create logic interfaces according to user requirements. In all the configurations at the same level as the interface configuration mode, the interface command can be used to switch to the corresponding interface configuration mode.
Example
Example 1: ! Enter the Ethernet interface configuration mode from the global configuration mode. Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0
1-6
Chapter 1
Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# Example 2: ! Enter the Serial0.1 configuration from the Ethernet0 configuration. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface serial0.1 Quidway(config-if-Serial0.1)#
Related Command
exit
1.9 language
Switch the language mode of command line interface language
Default
English
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For the convenience of demestic users, VRP EXEC mode interface supports not only English mode but also Chinese mode.
Exmaple
! Switch English mode to Chinese mode. Quidway(config)# language
Current Language : English Will You switch language mode ?(Y/N)y You have changed the language mode .
1.10 logic-channel
Use the logic-channel command to enter the related logic channel configuration mode. logic-channel logic-channel-number
Syntax Description
logic-channel-number Logic channel number, ranging 1 to 255.
1-7
Chapter 1
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Logic channels are mainly used in the backup center. The logic channels in the VRP1.4 backup center include X.25 and frame relay virtual circuits, or even a Dialer Map at the dialup interface. Logic channels can serve as main interfaces or backup interfaces for the backup center.
Example
! Enter the configuration on logic channel 0. Quidway(config)# logic-channel 0 Quidway(config-logic-channel0)#
Related Command
exit, dialer map, x25 map, frame-relay map
1.11 route-map
To create a route-map or enter the router-map configuration, use the route-map command. Use the no form of this command to delete corresponding route-map. route-map route-map-name { permit | deny } seq-number no route-map route-map-name { permit | deny } seq-number
Syntax Description
route-map-name Route map name. seq-number Sequence number.
Command Mode
Example
Quidway(config)# route-map test permit10
1.12 router
Use the router command to enter the corresponding routing protocol configuration. Use the no form of this command to disable the corresponding routing protocol. router ospf [ enable ] no router ospf enable
1-8
Chapter 1
router rip no router rip router igrp no router igrp router bgp as-number no router bgp
Syntax Description
The router ospf command can be used to enter the OSPF configuration. The router ospf enable command is used to enable OSPF and enter the OSPF configuration. as-number Autonomous system number, ranging 0 to 65535.
Default
No dynamic routing protocol enabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When multiple dynamic routing protocols run concurrently, please pay attention to the routing management policy of the system.
Example
! Enter the OSPF configuration in the global configuration mode. Quidway(config)# router ospf Quidway(config-router-ospf)#
Related Command
exit
1.13 vpdn-group
To create a VPDN group or enter the VPDN group configuration, use the vpdn-group command. Use the no form of this command to delete the corresponding VPDN group. vpdn-group group-number no vpdn-group [ group-number ]
Syntax Description
group-number VPDN group number, ranging 1 to 3000.
1-9
Chapter 1
Default
No VPDN group created.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The VPDN group is used for the VPN and L2TP configurations. In this mode, the Tunnel working parameter can be configured.
Example
! Create VPDN group 1 and enter its configuration. Quidway(config)# vpdn-group 1 Quidway(config-vpdn-group1)#
Related Command
exit
1.14 show history

To show the history command input by the current user, use the show history command. show history
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
VRP1.4 saves 10 history commands at maximum. You can access them through the Up and Down keys on the keyboard.
Example
! Show the history command input by the current user. Quidway# show history
enable configure interface serial 0 ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.0.0 exit exit
1-10
Chapter 2
System Management Commands
Chapter 2 System Management Commands

2.1 File Management Commands
File management commands include: configfile copy download config erase first-config get write show configfile show running-config show startup-config
2.1.1 configfile
To select the storage media for the current configuration file, use the configfile command. configfile { flash | nvram }
Syntax Description
flash Storage media for the current configuration file is Flash. nvram Storage media for the current configuration file is NVRAM.
Default
NVRAM as the default storage media when Flash and NVRAM co-exist.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The Quidway series of routers has Flash and NVRAM for saving configuration files, so the configfile command is used to select one of them as the currently valid media. The Related Command for read/write configuration files are intended for operations on the storage media currently selected. For example, after the configfile NVRAM command is executed, the write command is executed; now the configuration file will be saved to NVRAM instead of Flash. Before saving or erasing the configuration file, you can use the show configfile command to show the storage media for the current configuration file.
2-1
Chapter 2
Example
! Select NVRAM as the storage media for configuration file.
Quidway(config)# configfile NVRAM
Related Command
erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config, show configfile.
2.1.2 copy
To download the configuration file from the local router to the TFTP server, use the copy command. copy tftp_server_ip_address file_name
Syntax Description
tftp_server_ip_address The IP address of the TFTP server, in the format of A.B.C.D. file_name Filename, in the format of 8.3.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to download the configuration file by the filename of file_name in the local routers Flash or NVRAM to the TFTP server whose address is tftp_server_ip_address. Error numbers returned by this command indicate the results of the command execution, which are explained as follows: 0x00: successful. 0x01: memory insufficient. 0x02: setup request packet failed. 0x03: setup socket failed. 0x04: bundle socket failed. 0x05: transmission invalid. 0x06: partial file transferred. 0x10: error packet received. 0x07: the operation of sending file to the server failed 0x0b: socket setup failed 0x0c: the operation of reading file failed
2-2
Chapter 2
0x0d: host name resolution failed 0x0e: the operation of opening local file failed 0x0f: parameter invalid 0x10: error packet received 0x11: synchronization failed. 0x12: the operation of writing configuration file failed. 0x13: the operation of reading configuration file failed. 0x14: config file written by two or more users simultaneously 0x15: memory allocation failed. 0x16: file oversize 0x18: the operation of writing file failed
Example
! Download the configuration file from the local router to the TFTP server. Quidway# copy 10.110.1.1 sys.cfg
start uploading config file... Errno=0x0 end uploading.
In the above information, Errno stands for the result of command execution. For example, 0x0 means success, otherwise, failure.
Related Command
get
2.1.3 download config

To download configuration file via the Console of the router, use the download config command. download config
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command should be used under the guidance of a technical support engineer, and the configuration file of the router should be edited off-line by technical people or senior maintenance personnel. While editing the configuration file, please note: The configuration file for the router is composed of commands.
2-3
Chapter 2
Pressing the Enter key or adding a new line sign indicates the end of a command. Do not press the Enter key or add a new line sign in the middle of a command line. An explanatory line can be inserted between two command lines and begins with !. A whole configuration file uses End as its terminator. You load the configuration file via the Send Binary File function of the terminal simulator. Before sending a configuration file to the router, please make sure: Execute the download config command, and the router is waiting for loading. Now in the terminal simulators window, you can see that the router regularly sends the C character to the terminal simulator. Xmodem/CRC is set as the binary transmission protocol for the terminal simulator. The correct configuration file transfer has been selected. After loaded successfully, the configuration file can not take effect immediately; it takes effect only after the router is rebooted. If you have downloaded the wrong configuration file, the system will initialize via the default parameters after the rebooting. You can erase the wrong configuration file with the erase command or just reload the file. In the Quidway series of routers, the configuration file loaded will be stored in the media specified by the configfile command, NVRAM by default.
Example
!Download configuration file via the Console of the router. Quidway# download config
Do you want really download the config.ini?(Y/N)y Change protocol to Xmodem then send the selected file. Downloading... Download completed. Writing to flash memory... Write completed, please reboot the router.
Related Command
write, erase, show running-config, show startup-config
2.1.4 erase
Use the erase command to erase the routers configuration file in Flash or NVRAM. erase
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Be careful when executing this command. Youd better execute it under the guidance of a technical support engineer. This command is normally used in the following situations:
2-4
Chapter 2
When the router software has been upgraded, the configuration file in Flash may not match the new-version software. Now you can erase the old configuration file with the erase command. A used router is applied in a new environment, and the existing configuration file does not meet the new environment requirement. Now it is necessary to re-configure the router. You can make the reconfiguration after erasing the original configuration file. In the Quidway series of routers, the configuration file stored in the media specified by the configfile command will be erased. When the router is powered on and initializing, if the system detects no configuration file in Flash, then it will initialize the router via the default parameters.
Example
! Erase the routers configuration file in Flash or NVRAM. Quidway# erase
This will erase the configuration in the flash memory. The router configurations will be erased to reconfigure! Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Related Command
first-config, write, download config, show running-config, show startup-config
2.1.5 first-config
Set the flag bit to enter the initial setup. first-config { set | clear }
Syntax Description
set: set the flag bit. clear: delete the flag bit.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
first-config set is used to set the flag bit of the initial setup. After the flag bit is set, the router will delete the config files in Flash or NVRAM before the system enters setup mode in case of power off and reset. The operation is similar to erase command. first-config clear is used to cancel the setting of the flag bit. Do not use this command before write command, which also cancels the setting of the flag bit. Use this command cautiously, preferably under the guidance of technical support personnel.
2-5
Chapter 2
Example
! set the flag bit to enter setup. Quidway# first-config set ! Reset the router to enter setup mode. Quidway# reboot
WARNING: System will REBOOT! Continue ?[Y/N]y System is now rebooting, please wait
****************************************** * * * Quidway Series Router Bootrom, V4.25 * * * ****************************************** Copyright(C) 1999-2001 by HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD. Compiled at 09:06:32 , Jun 13 2001. Now testing memory...OK! 32M bytes DRAM 8192k bytes flash memory Press ENTER key to get start when you see ATS0=1. System now is starting... ATS0=1 Quidway>setup --- System Configuration Dialog --Default settings are in square brackets '[]', if you do not change the default settings, you may input enter. And Ctrl-C can cancel at any time without saving. Continue with configuration dialog? [yes]:
Related Command
erase, write, show running-config, show startup-config
2.1.6 get
Use the get command to download the configuration file in the TFTP server to Flash or NVRAM in the local router. get tftp_server_ip_address file_name
Syntax Description
tftp_server_ip_address The IP address of the TFTP server, in the format of A.B.C.D. file_name Filename, in the format of 8.3.
Command Mode
2-6
Chapter 2
Usage Guideline
This command is used to download the configuration by the name of file_name in the TFTP whose address is tftp_server_ip_address to the local routers Flash or NVRAM. Error numbers returned by this command indicate the results of the command execution, which are explained as follows: 0x00: successful. 0x01: memory insufficient. 0x02: setup request packet failed. 0x03: setup socket failed. 0x04: bundle socket failed. 0x05: transmission invalid. 0x06: partial file transferred. 0x10: error packet received. 0x07: the operation of sending file to the server failed 0x0b: socket setup failed 0x0c: the operation of reading file failed 0x0d: host name resolution failed 0x0e: the operation of opening local file failed 0x0f: parameter invalid 0x10: error packet received 0x11: synchronization failed. 0x12: the operation of writing configuration file failed. 0x13: the operation of reading configuration file failed. 0x14: config file written by two or more users simultaneously 0x15: memory allocation failed. 0x16: file oversize 0x18: the operation of writing file failed
Example
! Download the configuration file in the TFTP server to the local router. Quidway# get 10.110.1.1 sys.cfg
start downloading config file... errno=0x0 end downloading.
2-7
Chapter 2
In the above information, Errno stands for the result of command execution. For example, 0x0 stands for success, otherwise, failure.
Related Command
copy
2.1.7 write
Use the write command to save (write) the current configuration file to Flash or NVRAM. write
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When a set of configurations have been completed and have implemented the intended functions, the current configuration files should be saved to Flash or NVRAM (in he Quidway series of routers, they will be saved to the storage media specified by the configfile command).
Example
! Write the current configuration file to Flash or NVRAM. Quidway# write
Related Command
erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config
2.1.8 show configfile

Use the show configfile command to show the storage media type for the current configuration file. show configfile
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to show the storage media type for the current configuration file operation.
Example
! Show the storage media type for the current configuration file.
2-8
Chapter 2
Quidway(config)# show configfile

flash
Related Command
erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config, configfile.
2.1.9 show running-config

To show the currently valid configuration parameters of the router, use the show running-config command. show running-config
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When you have completed a set of configurations, it is necessary to check if they are correct. You can execute the show running-config command to check the currently valid parameter. If some parameters you already configured are not yet valid, they will not be shown. For example, if X.25 is encapsulated at a certain interface link layer, then you can now configure the PPP parameter at this interface. But when executing the show running-config command, you will not see any PPP configuration information at this interface. Some currently valid configuration parameters that are the same as the default running parameters will not be shown.
Example
! Show the currently valid configuration parameters of the router. Quidway# show running-config
! loghost 129.9.191.240 firewall enable snmp-server contact Mr.Wang-Tel:3306 snmp-server traps enable snmp-server host 129.102.149.23 snmp-server location telephone-closet,3rd-flood host liuzhenhua 129.102.157.55 host server 129.102.157.55 ! interface Ethernet0 ip address 129.102.100.141 255.255.0.0 ! interface Serial0 baudrate 9600 encapsulation ppp ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password ! interface Serial1 encapsulation ppp
quidway
2-9

ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password
Chapter 2
! interface Serial2 flowcontrol normal encapsulation ppp ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password ! end
quidway
quidway
Related Command
write, erase, download config, show startup-config
2.1.10 show startup-config

Use the show startup-config command to show the routers startup configuration file in Flash, that is, the configuration file used when the router is powered on and rebooted next time. show startup-config
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If the router fails to work normally after powered on, you can execute the show startup-config command to check the routers startup configuration file (in the Quidway series of routers, the startup configuration file is stored in the media specified by the configfile command).
Example
! Show the routers startup configuration file in Flash. Quidway# show startup-config
Related Command
write, erase, download config, show running-config
2.2 FTP Server Configuration Commands

FTP server configuration commands include: ftp-server config-name ftp-server enable ftp-server system-name ftp-server timeout show ftp
2-10
Chapter 2
2.2.1 ftp-server config-name

To set the configuration filename, use the ftp-server config-name command. ftp-server config-name config-name
Syntax Description
config-name Configuration filename.
Default
config
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The configuration filename is set for uploading the configuration file. Only when the name of the configuration file to be uploaded is the same as that set in the router can it be correctly uploaded.
Example
! Specify the name of the configuration file as quidway. Quidway(config)# ftp-server config-name quidway
2.2.2 ftp-server enable

To enable the FTP server, use the ftp-server enable command. Use the no form of this command to disable the FTP server. ftp-server enable no ftp-server enable
Default
Ftp server disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command can be used to enable or disable the FTP server easily so as to safeguard the router against attack by any unknown user.
2-11
Chapter 2
Example
! Disable the FTP server. Quidway(config)# no ftp-server enable
2.2.3 ftp-server system-name

To set the name of the system program file, use the ftp-server system-name command. ftp-server system-name system-name
Syntax Description
system-name System program filename.
Default
system
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The system program filename is set to upload the system program file. Only when the name of the system program file to be uploaded is the same as that set in the router, can it be uploaded correctly.
Example
! Set the system program filename to program. Quidway(config)# ftp-server config-name program
2.2.4 ftp-server timeout

To set the connection timeout, use the ftp-server timeout command. ftp-server timeout second
Syntax Description
second Timeout value, in seconds.
Default
600 seconds.
Command Mode
2-12
Chapter 2
Usage Guideline
When you logs into the FTP server, you set up a connection with it. If the connection is disconnected abnormally or you disconnect abnormally, the FTP will not be able to know this, so it still maintains the connection. Therefore the connection timeout is used to avoid such a situation. When the connection has not carried out any command exchange in a certain period of time, the FTP server will deem the connection as failed, and then disconnect the connection.
Example
! Set the connection timeout to 500 seconds. Quidway(config)# ftp-server timeout 500
2.2.5 show ftp-server

Use the show ftp-server command to show the parameters of the current FTP server. show ftp-server
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the FTP server parameters have been set, this command can be used to show the results.
Example
! Show the results of FTP server parameter settings. Quidway(config)# show ftp-server
ConfigName SystemName TimeOut config system 600
2.3 Basic System Management Commands

Basic system management commands include: clock set hostname reboot setup show clock show hostname show queue show version
2.3.1 clock set

Use the clock set command to set the current date and clock of the router.
2-13
Chapter 2
clock set hour:minute:second day month year
Syntax Description
hour:minute:second Current clock. hour, ranging 1 to 24; minute and second, ranging 1 to 60. year/month/day Current date. year, ranging 1997 to 2097, month, ranging 1 to 12, day, ranging 1 to 31.
Default
If the router is not yet equipped with a hardware real-time clock, the default clock is 0:0:0 1/1/1997 when the system is booted. If equipped with a real-time clock, the system will read the clock value when booted, and use it for setting the system time.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When powered off, the Quidway series of routers can not continue to keep clock, so it is necessary to set the current date and clock for the router in a rigorous application environment requiring the absolute clock and date.
Example
! Set the current date and clock of the router to 0:0:0 Jan. 1st, 2000. Quidway# clock set 0:0:0 1 1 2000
Related Command
show clock
2.3.2 hostname
Use the hostname command to set the hostname of the router. hostname hostname
Syntax Description
hostname Hostname of the router, represented in a character string.
Default
Quidway
Command Mode
2-14
Chapter 2
Usage Guideline
Modifying the hostname of the router will affect the prompts at the command line interface. If the routers hostname is Quidway, then its prompt in privileged user mode is Quidway#.
Example
! Set the hostname of the router to QuidwayR2501. Quidway# hostname QuidwayR2501 QuidwayR2501#
Related Command
show hostname
2.3.3 reboot
Use the reboot command to reboot the router. reboot
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The function of this command is similar to first powering off the router and then restarting it. But when the router is maintained remotely, it is not necessary to reboot the router where the router is located; instead, you can directly reboot it remotely. Generally, do not use this command, for it will lead to network failure in a short time. In addition, it is necessary to ensure if the routers configuration file needs to be saved.
Example
! Reboot the router. Quidway# reboot
warnings: System will REBOOT! Continue?[Y/N]y System is now rebooting, please wait.
2.3.4 setup
Use the setup command to guide you interactively to configure the basic parameters necessary for the running of the router. setup
2-15
Chapter 2
Default
When a certain parameter is to be configured, if this parameter is found already configured, then its current value is shown as a default value. And you can directly press Enter without modifying it.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When you power on and boots the router for the first time, the system will automatically execute the setup command to guide you in configuring the parameters necessary for the running of the router. These parameters include: Routers hostname Privileged user password SNMP parameter Selecting such network protocols as IP and IPX IP addresses and IPX network numbers at the interfaces In addition, the privileged user can execute the setup command at any point.
Example
Quidway# setup
--- System Configuration Dialog --Default settings are in square brackets '[]', if you do not change the default settings, you may input enter. And Ctrl-C can cancel at any time without saving. Continue with configuration dialog? [yes]:y Firstly, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]:y Interface IP-Address Ethernet0 129.102.100.141 Serial0 Serial1 Serial2 Configuring global parameters: Enter host name [Quidway]: Enter enable password []: Configure SNMP Network Management? Community string []:public Configure IP? [yes]: Configure IPX? [NO]:y OK? yes yes yes yes Status down up up up Protocol up down down down
[YES]:
Configuring interface Ethernet0: Is this interface in use? [YES]: Configure IP on this interface? [YES]: IP address for this interface [129.102.100.141]: Netmask [255.255.0.0]: Class B network is 129.102.0.0. IP address is 129.102.100.141, netmask is 255.255.0.0. Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:y IPX network number for this interface [1]: Configuring interface Serial0: Is this interface in use? [YES]: Configure IP on this interface? [NO]:
2-16

Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]: Configuring interface Serial1: Is this interface in use? [YES]: Configure IP on this interface? [NO]: Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]: Configuring interface Serial2: Is this interface in use? [YES]: Configure IP on this interface? [NO]: Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:
Chapter 2
The following configuration was created: hostname Quidway enable password snmp-server community ro ipx routing interface Ethernet0 no shutdown ip address 129.102.100.141 255.255.0.0 ipx network 1 interface Serial0 no shutdown no ip address no ipx network interface Serial1 no shutdown no ip address no ipx network interface Serial2 no shutdown no ip address no ipx network end Use this configuration? [yes/no]: Now writing the configuration to flash memory. Write the running config to flash memory successfully. Please reboot the router.
2.3.5 show clock

To show the current date and clock of the system, use the show clock command. show clock
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
You can execute this command to find out if the system time is correct. If the system time is incorrect, you can adjust it.
Example
Quidway# show clock 8:18:28 Jan 6 1999
2-17
Chapter 2
Related Command
clock set
2.3.6 show hostname

To show the routers hostname, use the show hostname command. show hostname
Command Mode
User mode and Privileged user mode
Example
Quidway# show hostname
Quidway
Related Command
hostname
2.3.7 show queueing

To show the queue in the system, use the show queue command. show queueing
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command shows the current length, limit length, dropped packets, queue head and tail, etc. of receive and send queues, IP receive queue, ARP receive queue, and IPX receive queue, at the interfaces. This command can be generally used by the technical support engineer in fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show queueing
Interface Dialer1: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue head --> 0x0, Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue head --> 0x0, Interface Ethernet0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue head --> 0x0, Receive queue: Current length : 2, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue tail --> 0x0 Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue tail --> 0x0 Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue tail --> 0x0 Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0
2-18
Chapter 2
Queue head --> 0x7de480, Queue tail --> 0x7de400 Interface LoopBack0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Interface Serial0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Interface Serial1: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Interface Serial2: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 ip receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 arp receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 50 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 ipx receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0
: 0 : 0
: 0 : 0
: 0 : 0
: 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0
Related Command
ifquelen ip, ifquelen arp
2.3.8 show version

To show the system version information, use the show version command. show version
Command Mode
Privileged user mode and User mode
Usage Guideline
Different versions have different functions. By querying the version information, you will know the features supported by the software.
Example
Quidway# show version
2-19
Chapter 2
Quidway Router Software Version 3.0-Mar 17 1999-03:31:59 Copyright (c) 1997-2000 SHENZHEN HUAWEI TECH CO.,LTD.hardware
version is 1.0
2-20
Chapter 3
Terminal Service Configuration Commands
Chapter 3 Terminal Service Configuration Commands

3.1 Terminal Service Attribute Configuration Commands
Terminal service attribute configuration commands include: exec-timeout
3.1.1 exec-timeout
To start the function of the timed disconnection with the terminal client, use the exectimeout command. Use the no form of this command to shut down the function. exec-timeout no EXEC-timeout
Default
Timed disconnection enabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For a Console client, the disconnection timeout is 3 minutes. For a dummy client, the disconnection timeout is 10 minutes. You can shut down this function via the no exec-timeout command so the terminal client will never be disconnected.
Example
! Shut down the function of timed disconnection with the terminal user. Quidway# no exec-timeout
3.2 Telnet Service Configuration Commands

Telnet service configuration commands include: terminal telnet refuse-negotiation telnet show client
3.2.1 terminal telnet refuse-negotiation

To disable the telnet client negotiation function, use the terminal telnet refusenegotiation command. Use the no form of this command to enable this function.
3-1
Chapter 3
terminal telnet refuse-negotiation no terminal telnet refuse-negotiation
Default
Telnet client negotiation disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For the routers Reverse Telnet terminal service, it is sometimes necessary to set up a connection via the TCP client. And the client data are directly transparently transferred to the router via the transmission layer interface to communicate directly with the asynchronous port corresponding to the port specified by the TCP connection. You can disable the telnet negotiation function for Reverse Telnet terminal service via the terminal telnet refuse-negotiation command. This command is only effective for QuidwayR1600/2500/2500E/4000/4000E series of routers.
Example
! Disable the telnet negotiation function for the Reverse Telnet terminal. Quidway(config)# terminal telnet refuse-negotiation
3.2.2 telnet
To log onto other routers from the current router via the Telnet tool, use the telnet command. telnet host-ip-address [ service-port ]
Syntax Description
host-ip-address IP address of the remote router, in the dotted decimal format. service-port TCP port number via which the router provides the Telnet service. Ranging 0 to 65535.
Default
Default Telnet port number is 23.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By executing the telnet command, you can easily log from a router onto another for remote management.
3-2
Chapter 3
If the destination IP address is the IP address of the local router, and the specified port number is 2000+n (n is the sequence number of the asynchronous interface), then you can communicate with the external device (like an external Modem) via the corresponding asynchronous port.
Example
! Log from the current router Quidway1 to another router Quidway2 (IP address: 129.102.0.1) Quidway# telnet 129.102.0.1
Trying hostaddress... Service port is 23 Connected to hostaddress Quidway2>
Related Command
show client, show tcp brief
3.2.3 show client

To show all the clients of the router, use the show client command. show client
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If the router suddenly starts to work abnormally or its working parameters are modified, now this command can be used to show if other privileged clients are modifying the system configuration. The information shown via this command includes the user ID allocated by the system and the IP address for this client.
Example
! Show all the clients of the router. Quidway# show client
Client ID 2555904 IP Address 129.102.1.92
Related Command
telnet, show tcp brief
3.3 Terminal Server Configuration Commands

Terminal server configuration commands include: async mode tty autocommand
3-3
Chapter 3
tty logo-print tty menu-key tty-server app tty-server enable tty-server source-ip tty test-key show tty show tty-server
3.3.1 async mode tty

To configure the physical terminal and virtual terminal of the access server of dumb terminal, use the async mode tty command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the existing configurations. async mode tty tty-number vty-number app-number no async mode tty [ vty-number ]
Syntax Description
tty-number Physical terminal number. vty-number Virtual terminal number on the physical terminal. app-number Application program number.
Command Mode
Asynchronous serial interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
The physical terminal number corresponds with the asynchronous serial port on the router. The access server of dumb terminal numbers all the physical terminals connected the computer in unification. On the access server of dumb terminal, a maximum of 4 virtual terminals can be configured for each physical terminal. The virtual terminal corresponds with the application program of the host computer to be connected.
Example
! Set the physical terminal number of the access server of dumb terminal corresponding with the asynchronous serial interface Async 1 to 1. Set the virtual terminal number to 0 and the application program number of the UNIX program used to 0. Quidway(config-if-Async1)# async mode tty 1 0 0
3.3.2 autocommand
Use the autocommand command to enable the automatic execution of the command when the interface operates in the interactive mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the automatic execution of the command. autocommand command
3-4
Chapter 3
no autocommand command
Syntax Description
command A valid command string.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After the user logs in to the router through dumb terminal mode, some of the specified commands will be executed automatically and the user will enter into the given operating mode.
Example
! Enable automatic execution of telnet command on the asynchronous serial interface Async 1. Quidway(config-if-Async1)# autocommand telnet 10.110.164.44
Related Command
async mode interactive
3.3.3 tty logo-print

To display the logo image of terminal server, use the tty logo-print command. Use the no form of this command to cancel display. tty logo-print no tty logo-print
Default
The system will not display the logo image of Huawei terminal server.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
You can choose to display or not display the logo image of the Huawei terminal server by this command. This command can be configured, when and only when the asynchronous serial port configured has started the terminal server function.
Example
! Set up the asynchronous serial interface Async 0 to display the logo image of Huawei terminal server. Quidway(config-if-Async0)# tty logo-print
3-5
Chapter 3
3.3.4 tty menu-key

Use the tty menu-key command to set up the hot key to be used to start up the menu function of the dumb terminal server. Use the no form of this command to cancel the setup. tty menu-key ascii-code no tty menu-key
Syntax Description
ascii-code The ASCII value corresponded with the hot key. The hot key is used to activate the menu.
Default
No hot key will be set up.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After one asynchronous serial interface has started up the function of the access server of dumb terminal, you can define the hot key to activate the menu with this command, to start up the function of the menu of the dumb terminal server. Moreover, you can use the hot key to conduct dynamic switchover between multiple application programs. After the hot key to activate the function of menu of the dumb terminal is set up, the operation of the terminal is likely to be abnormal, since the ASCII value of the hot key set up is probably same as the uplink data of some of the terminals. In this case, you need to re-specify the ASCII value of the hot key or cancel the setup of the hot key.
Example
! Set up the key to activate the menu to XXX on the asynchronous serial interface Async 0. Quidway(config-if-async0)# tty menu-key XXX
3.3.5 tty-server app

To specify the application program on the UNIX host computer end, use the tty-server app command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the appointment. tty-server app app-number ip-address port [ app-name ] no tty-server app app-number
Syntax Description
app-number Number of the application program on the UNIX host computer end. One access server of dumb terminal can be configured with a maximum of 4 application programs. Moreover any of the number of the application program should duplicate.
3-6
Chapter 3
ip-address The IP address of the UNIX host computer where the application program is on. port TCP port number of the application program on the UNIX host computer, ranging 1024 to 65535. app-name Name of the application program, with no more than 18 English letters.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The uplink of the access server of dumb terminal corresponds with the application program of UNIX host computer. Multiple application programs can be one on UNIX host computer or distribute over multiple UNIX host computers. The access server of dumb terminal can number all the application programs in unification and multiplex to one TCP link the data flow of all the dumb terminals to one application program. All the settings of the virtue terminals corresponding with the application program will be canceled automatically, once the specification of the application program of the host computer is cancelled.
Example
! Specify the application program counter. Its number is 0, so the IP address on the UNIX host computer is 1.1.1.1 and the TCP port number is 2000. Quidway(config)# tty-server app 0 1.1.1.1 2000 counter
Related Command
async mode tty, show tty-server
3.3.6 tty-server enable

To enable the access server of dumb terminal, use the tty-server enable command. Use the no form of this command to shut down the access server of dumb terminal. tty-server enable no tty-server enable
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Please enable it before you use and configure the access server of dumb terminal. When the access server of dumb terminal is enabled, and the application program of the host computer, physical terminal and the virtual terminal are correctly configured, the corresponding asynchronous port on the router will change to UP state, after the dumb terminal is powered on. And the access server of dumb terminal will establish TCP connection with the application program of the host computer automatically, and
3-7
Chapter 3
the dumb terminal will enter into the log-on interface of the application program. After the access server of dumb terminal is shut down, the configuration of the application of the host computer, physical terminal and virtual terminal will be retained, not be canceled automatically.
Example
! Enable the access server of dumb terminal. Quidway(config)# tty-server enable
Related Command
show tty-server
3.3.7 tty-server source-ip

To bind TCP source address, use the tty-server source-ip command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the binding of TCP source address. tty-server source-ip app-number ip-address no tty-server source-ip app-number
Syntax Description
app-number Number of the application program, used to identify the IP address of TCP connection to be bounds. ip-address IP address to be bound.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Sometimes when multiple dumb terminals multiplex one TCP connection to establish relationships with the application programs of the host computer by the access server of dumb terminal, the real IP address in the TCP connection of the uplink of the access server of dumb terminal needs to be hidden up and set up to other IP address as required, out of consideration of security and other things. Generally, the binding of source address chooses the interface not used of the router, such as dial interface. In addition, the binding of TCP source address should be set up before the TCP connection is established. Otherwise, its invalid.
Example
! Bind the TCP source address of the application program 0 to 27.222.48.73. Quidway(config)# tty-server source-ip 0 27.222.48.73
Related Command
show tty-server
3-8
Chapter 3
3.3.8 tty test-key

Use the tty test-key command to activate test function of terminal. Use the no form of this command to cancel the test function of the terminal. tty test-key ascii-code no tty test-key
Syntax Description
ascii-code The ASCII value corresponding with the hot key. The hot key is used to activate test of the terminal.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After the hot key of terminal test is configured on one asynchronous serial port, you can press hot key on the terminal and Terminal test OK! will be displayed on the dumb terminal, if the connection between the dumb terminal and the router is correct. After the test function of the terminal is activated, the operation of the terminal is likely to be abnormal, since the ASCII value of the hot key is probably same as the uplink data of some of the terminals. In this case, you need to re-specify the ASCII value of the hot key or cancel the test function of the terminal.
Example
! On the asynchronous serial interface Async 0, set up the key to activate terminal test to XXX. Quidway(config-if-async0)# tty test-key XXX
3.3.9 show tty

To show the relevant information of the physical terminal and virtual terminal, use the show tty command. show tty
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By using this command, the state information of the physical terminal and the virtual terminal can be shown on the access server of the dumb terminal, thus you can monitor and maintain the access server of the dumb terminal.
Example
! Show information of physical terminal and virtual terminal.
3-9
Chapter 3
Quidway# show tty

INTERFACE Async0 TTY_ID 0 VTY_ID 0 APP_ID 0 TTY_STATE ok VTY_STATE set
The explanation of the information shown is as follows: The number of the physical terminal configured on the asynchronous serial port Async 0 is 0. The number of the virtual terminal configured on the physical terminal is 0. The number of the application program of the host computer corresponding with the virtual terminal is 0. The physical terminal is powered on and is connected with the access server of the dumb terminal. The virtual terminal is configured.
Related Command
async mode tty, tty-server app, tty-server enable, show tty-server
3.3.10 show tty-server

To show the relevant information of the application program on the UNIX host computer side, use the show tty-server command. show tty-server
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
With this command, the state and configuration information of the application program of the host computer, the physical terminal and the virtual terminal can be displayed on the access server of the dumb terminal, thus you can monitor and maintain the access server of the dumb terminal.
Example
! Show the information of the application program. Quidway# show tty-server
APP_ID 0 HOST_IP 1.1.1.1 PORT 2000 STATE linked APP_NAME counter
The explanation of the information shown is as follows: The application program numbered 0 of the UNIX host computer is on the UNIX host computer whose IP address is 1.1.1.1; the number of the TCP port selected and used is 2000; the access server of dumb terminal has established TCP connection with the program; the name of the application program is counter.
Related Command
tty-server app, tty-server enable, tty-server source-ip, show tty
3.4 PRI Terminal Configuration Commands

PRI Terminal configuration commands include:
3-10
Chapter 3
pri-interactive pri-autocommand
3.4.1 pri-interactive
To enable the PRI terminal functions, use the pri-interactive command. Use the no form of this command to disable the PRI terminal function. pri-interactive no pri-interactive
Command Mode
PRI interface configuration mode
Default
PRI terminal function disabled.
Usage Guideline
Before using this command, please first use the pri-group command at the cE1/PRI interface to bind the time slots. This command is only effective for QuidwayR4000/4000E series of routers,
Example
! Enable the PRI terminal functions at the interface Serail2:15. Quidway(config-if-Serial2:15)# pri-interactive
Related Command
pri-group, pri-autocommand
3.4.2 pri-autocommand
To configure a command so that it can be automatically executed after the login of the PRI terminal client, use the pri-autocommand command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the configuration of automatic execution of commands. pri-autocommand { command } [ parameters ] ... no pri-autocommand { command } [ parameters ] ...
Syntax Description
command Any executable command of the router. parameters Command parameters, which can be many.
Default
No automatically executed commands configured.
3-11
Chapter 3
Command Mode
PRI interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
This command will not take effect until the pri-interactive command is used to enable the PRI mute terminal functions. This command is only effective for QuidwayR4000/4000E series of routers.
Example
! Specify the telnet 192.168.0.1 command automatically executed at the Interface Serial2:15. Quidway(config-if-Serial2:15)# pri-autocommand telnet 192.168.0.1
Related Command
pri-interactive
3.5 X.25 PAD configuration commands

X.25 PAD configuration commands include: login pad pad x29 invite clear-time show x25 pad debug pad
3.5.1 login pad

To start the AAA authentication of the X.25 PAD Server end, use the login pad command. To cancel the authentication, use the no form of this command. login pad no login pad
Default
By default, AAA authentication of the Server end is not set.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When X.25 PAD is used for remote configuration, if it is necessary to authenticate the user efficiency, the user command can be used to set the valid X.25 PAD remote login user at the Server end. Then this command is used to start the AAA authentication at the Server end.
3-12
Chapter 3
As to the detailed description of the meaning, parameter and usage of the user command, please refer to the Security Configuration part of this manual.
Example
! The following example sets an X.25 PAD remote user at the local end. Quidway(config)# user paduser service-type exec password 7 padpass ! The following example starts the AAA authentication of the local end to the X.25 PAD user. Quidway(config)# login pad
Related Command
user, pad
3.5.2 pad
To initiate the X.25 PAD calling to the Server end with specified X.121 address, use the pad command. pad x.121-address
Parameter Description
x.121-address The X.121 address of the Server end of X.25 PAD. Please refer to ITU-T Recommendation X.121 and related RFC files for the X.121 address format.
Command Mode
Common user mode, privileged mode
Usage Guideline
On the router interconnected through the X.25 network, this command can be used to initiate the X.25 PAD calling to log in the remote Server end. Then the remote router can be configured. It must be ensured that both ends support the X.25 PAD features. Otherwise the calling cannot succeed. After successful calling, the party initiating the calling (Client end) will enter the configuration interface of the called party (Server end).
Example
! The following example initiates the X.25 PAD calling to QuidwayB at the Server end with the X.121 address of 123456 from QuidwayA. After successful calling, log in QuidwayB. QuidwayA# pad 123456 Trying 123456...Open QuidwayB#
Related Command
login pad, show x25 pad, debug pad
3-13
Chapter 3
3.5.3 x29 inviteclear-time

To set the response time of the Server end of X.25 PAD to X.29 Invite Clear messages, use the x29 inviteclear-time command. x29 inviteclear-time time
time Response time in second, and the value ranges from 5 to 2147483.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the Server end of X.25 PAD for some reason (For example: the Client end sends the exit request or it is needed to release link resources etc.) sends link clearance message Invite Clear to the Client end, the Server end will wait for the response from the Client end. If the Client end fails to respond within the specified time, the Server end will clear the link positively.
Example
! The following example sets the response time of the local end to the X.29 Invite Clear message to 1000 seconds. Quidway(config)# x29 inviteclear-time 1000
3.5.4 show x25 pad

To display the related information of X.25 PAD, use the show x25 pad command. show x25 pad
Command Mode
Privileged mode
Usage Guideline
This command can be used to display such information as message transmission of X.25 PAD and X.3 parameter setting etc., so as to maintain X.25 PAD and perform fault diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Example
! The following example displays the related information of the local X.25 PAD. Quidway# show x25 pad
connection 1 to host 123456 PAD0: Total input: 12, control 3, bytes 35, QueuedIn: 1 of 56. Total output: 10, control 3, bytes 64, QueuedOut: 2 of 56. State: 3, Last error: 1 ParamsIn: 1:0, 2:0, 3:0, 4:0, 5:0, 6:0, 7:0, 8:0, 9:0, 10:0, 11:0, 12:0, 13:0, 14:0, 15:0,
3-14
Chapter 3
16:0, 17:0, 18:0, 19:0, 20:0, 21:0, 22:0, ParamsOut: 1:1, 2:0, 3:2, 4:1, 5:1, 6:0, 7:21, 8:0, 9:1, 10:0, 11:14, 12:1, 13:0, 14:0, 15:0, 16:127, 17:21, 18:18, 19:0, 20:0, 21:0, 22:0,
The above displayed information includes: message transmission information Total input/output, QueuedIn/Out, State, Last error and X.3 parameter setting information (Paramsln/out). The Paramsln information refers to the X.3 parameter information received by the local end, and the ParamsOut information refers to the X.3 information issued by the local end.
Related Command
pad
3.5.5 debug pad

To enable the debugging at all levels, use the debug pad command. To disable the level-corresponding debugging, use the no form of this command. debug pad [ packet | error | all ] no debug pad [ packet | error | all ]
packet Enable the packet debugging. error Enable the error debugging. all Enable all the debugging.
Default
By default, the debugging is disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command can be used to enable the X.25 PAD debugging at all levels. The X.25 PAD related information will be displayed along with the configuration information of the end being configured (Server end). Based on this information, the user can monitor and maintain X.25 PAD as well as performing fault diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Note: Please use this command under the guidance of the technical supporting personnel.
Related Command
pad
3-15
Chapter 3
3.6 Rlogin configuration command

Rlogin configuration includes the following command: rlogin
3.6.1 rlogin
To set up Rlogin connection, use the rlogin command. To shut down Rlogin connection, use the exit command. rlogin host-ip-address [{-l | / user} username ] [ debug [ debug-level ] ] exit
Command Mode
host-ip-address The IP address of the UNIX host to be logged in. -l Specify the remote login user name to come into compatibility with standard BSD UNIX Rlogin. If the keyword is not used, the system will adopt the routers local user as the login user name. / user Specify remote login user name. If the keyword parameter is not used, the system will adopt the routers local user as the login user name. username The remote login user name. This user must have registered on the UNIX host, otherwise the remote login will fail. debug Turn on the debugging information switch of the Rlogin protocol of the system. debug-level Specify the output level of the debugging information. The value range is 0~4. The larger the value, the higher will the level be. When debug-level=4, the system will display all the debugging information.
Usage Guideline
Rlogin (Client) function can make the digital or analogue user terminal that has logged in the router via the dummy terminal access function log in the UNIX host by using Rlogin protocol. This command can be used to establish the Rlogin connection to the UNIX host.
Example
! The following example establishes user root on the router. After authentication, the user can log on the UNIX host legally. Quidway# rlogin 1.1.254.78 -l root
Trying 1.1.254.78 ... Password: Last successful login for root: Thu Sep 06 15:14:15 2001 on ttyp0 Last unsuccessful login for root: Thu Sep 06 14:22:35 2001 on ttyp0 SCO OpenServer(TM) Release 5 (C) 1976-1998 The Santa Cruz Operation, Inc. 1980-1994 Microsoft Corporation rights reserved. (C) All
3-16
Chapter 3
For complete copyright credits, enter "copyrights" at the command prompt. you have mail Terminal type is vt100 # If the exit command is inputted now, the Rlogin connection can be shut down. # exit connection closed
3-17
Chapter 4
SNMP Configuration Commands
Chapter 4 SNMP Configuration Commands

4.1 SNMP Configuration Commands
SNMP configuration commands include: snmp-server community snmp-server contact snmp-server enable traps snmp-server host snmp-server location snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1 show snmp
4.1.1 snmp-server community

To set the community name and access authority, use the snmp-server community command. snmp-server community {ro | rw} community-name Use the no form of this command to restore the default community name according to different access authority. no snmp-server community { ro | rw }
Syntax Description
community-name Communication name, represented in a string. ro and rw Access authority: read-only and read-write.
Default
The system deems the community name with read-only authority as public, and the community name with read-write authority as private.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
SNMP V1 adopts the community name-based authentication scheme: the SNMP packets not matching the community name recognized by the device. Different communities can have either of read-only access authority and read-write access authority. Communities with read-only authority can query device information, and those with write and read authority can make configurations for the device.
4-1
Chapter 4
Example
! Set the public community as a community with read-only authority, and the private community as a community with read-write authority. Quidway(config)# snmp-server community ro public Quidway(config)# snmp-server community rw private
4.1.2 snmp-server contact

To set the IDs and contact methods of the network administrators, use the snmpserver contact command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default ID and contact method. snmp-server contact sysContact no snmp-server location
Syntax Description
syscontact The IDs and contact methods of network administrators, represented in a character string.
Default
SysAdmin
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When there is trouble with the network, you can contact the network administrator according to this information.
Example
! Set the IDs and contact sysadmin:XXX(Tel:1234). methods of the network administrators as
Quidway(config)# snmp-server contact sysadmin:XXX(Tel:1234)
4.1.3 snmp-server enable traps

To enable SNMP Trap, use the snmp-server enable traps command. Use the no form of this command to disable SNMP Trap. snmp-server enable traps no snmp-server enable traps
Default
snmp-server enable traps is disabled.
4-2
Chapter 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
SNMP Trap is information not requested that the managed equipment initiate to send to the NMS for reporting some urgent, important events.
Example
! Disable snmp-server enable traps. Quidway(config)# no snmp-server enable traps
Related Command
snmp-server host
4.1.4 snmp-server host

To set the IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap, use the snmp-server host command. snmp-server host host-ip-address
Syntax Description
host-ip-address IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap, in the dotted decimal format.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After the system is enabled to send SNMP Trap, you should specify the IP address of the destination host.
Example
! Set the IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap to 129.102.0.1. Quidway(config)# snmp-server host 129.102.0.1
Related Command
snmp-server enable traps
4.1.5 snmp-server location

To set the location of the router, use the snmp-server location command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default location.
4-3
Chapter 4
snmp-server location syslocation no snmp-server location
Syntax Description
syslocation Location of the router, represented as a character string.
default
Beijin
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
To locate the router quickly, network administrators can use this command to show the location of the router.
Example
! Set the location of the router. Quidway(config)# snmp-server location beijing-huawei-401
4.1.6 snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1

To enable the router to send Authentication Trap, use the snmp-server trapauthentication snmpv1 command. Use the no form of this command to make the router stop sending Authentication Trap. snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1 no snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1
Default
Authentication Trap sending disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Authentication Trap is one kind of SNMP Trap. If Authentication Trap sending is enabled, then when the managed equipment receives a request containing an incorrect community name, it can send Authentication Trap to the NMS.
Example
! Disable the Authentication Trap sending. Quidway(config)# no snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1
4-4
Chapter 4
Related Command
snmp-server enable traps, snmp-server host
4.1.7 show snmp

Use the show snmp command to show the statistics about the SNMP Agent packets input and output. show snmp
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The following table shows the meanings of the fields in SNMP Agent packets input and output. Table FC-4-1 Statistics about SNMP packets
Information shown Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Get-request PDUs Get-next PDUs Set-request PDUs Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Get-response PDUs SNMP trap PDUs Meaning Unidentifiable community name Illegal operation Encoding errors Get-request PDUs Get-next PDUs Set-request PDUs Errors too big to generate any response PDU Specified name errors not existing Errors with bad values General errors Get-response PDUs SNMP trap PDUs
Example
! Show the statistics about the SNMP Agent packets input and output. Quidway# show snmp
70 SNMP packets input. 0 Unknown community name. 0 Illegal operation for community name supplied. 0 Encoding errors. 10 Get-request PDUs. 60 Get-next PDUs. 0 Set-request PDUs. 73 SNMP packets output. 0 Too big errors. 4 No such name errors. 0 Bad values errors. 0 General errors. 70 Get-response PDUs. 3 SNMP trap PDUs.
4-5
Chapter 4
4.2 RMON configuration command

RMON configuration commands include: rmon promiscuous clear rmon statistics show rmon statistics
4.2.1 rmon promiscuous

To enable the RMON statistics function of the Ethernet interface, use the no form of this command to disable the RMON statistics function. rmon promiscuous no rmon promiscuous
Default
Disable the RMON statistics function.
Command Mode
Ethernet interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
The router can collect the original data needed by RMON only when RMON statistics function at the Ethernet interface is enabled. Otherwise the statistics data can not be viewed via RMON.MIB. If the Ethernet interface is configured with Bridge protocol, the router can provide RMON with the statistic of the frame whose destination is another router.
Example
! Enable the RMON statistics function Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# rmon promiscuous
Related Command
clear rmon statistics, show rmon statistics
4.2.2 clear rmon statistics

To clear the entire RMON statistic data of the Ethernet interface, use the clear rmon statistics command. clear rmon statistics
Command Mode
4-6
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
This command is used to delete the statistical data after RMON statistics function of the Ethernet interface is enabled.
Example
! Clear all the RMON statistical data of the Ethernet interface. Quidway# clear rmon statistics
Related Command
rmon promiscuous, show rmon statistics
4.2.3 show rmon statistics

To show the RMON statistical results of Ethernet interface, use show rmon statistics command. show rmon statistics
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to show RMON statistical results of the Ethernet interface with enabled RMON statistics function.
Example
! Show RMON statistical results of the Ethernet interface. Quidway#show rmon statistics
Related Command
rmon promiscuous, clear rmon statistics
4-7
Chapter 5
Maintenance and Debugging Tool Commands
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Debugging Tool Commands

5.1 System Debugging Commands
System debug commands include: debug show debugging
5.1.1 debug
Use the debug command to turn on the system debug switch. Use the no form of this command to turn off this switch. debug { all | { protocol-name | function-name } [ debug-option ] } no debug { all | { protocol-name | function-name } [ debug-option ] }
Syntax Description
all Turning on/off all debug switches.
Default
All debug switches turned off.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
VRP1.4 provides a vast array of debug functions, which are generally intended for technical support engineers and senior maintenance personnel. When the debug switch is turned on, a large volume of debug information will be generated, leading to deterioration of system efficiency. In particular, when the debug all command is executed to turn on all the debug switches, this may result in collapse in the network system. So the debug all command is not recommended. On the contrary, the no debug all command will greatly convenience you, for it enables you to turn off all the debug switches at one single time, and you do not have to turn them off on a one-by-one basis. In addition, any terminal user turning on or off debug switches will affect the output of debug information at the other user terminals. As for the link-layer protocols, their debug switches can be controlled based on their interfaces. This effectively avoids the interference from a large amount of redundant information and expedites network fault diagnosis and location.
5-1
Chapter 5
In VRP1.3 and the subsequent versions, the output debug information and other various prompt information is managed via Syslog in a unified manner. So we will not provide the monitor and the unmonitored. In their stead, you need to turn on the corresponding Syslog switch for debug information. First, you must use the logging on command to start the Syslog function; then, according to the terminal types you used currently, use the logging console or logging monitor command to turn on the debug information output switch. On the Console, please use the logging console debugging command; at the Telnet terminal or dummy terminal, please use the logging monitor debugging command. For detail, please consult the Syslog configuration part.
Example
Example 1: ! Enable the IP Packet debugging. Quidway# debug ip packet
IP packet debugging switch is on.
Example 2: ! Enable the PPP packet debugging at serial0. Quidway# debug ppp packet interface serial0
PPP packet debugging switch is on.
Related Command
show debugging, logging on, logging console, logging monitor
5.1.2 show debugging

To show the debug switches already turned on, use the show debugging command. show debugging
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
To check which debug switches have been turned on, you can execute the show debugging command. Debug switches are shown in two parts: a) link-layer debug switches already turned on that are shown according to the order of the interfaces, which are valid to interfaces only; b) global debug switches.
Example
! Show the debug switches already turned on. Quidway#show debugging
interface serial0: PPP packet debugging switch is on. global debugging switch : ip packet debugging switch is on
5-2
Chapter 5
Related Command
debug
5.2 Network Test Tool Commands

Network test tool commands include: ping ping ipx tracert
5.2.1 ping
To check if the IP network connection and host are reachable, use the ping command. ping [ ip ] [ -R ] [ -d ] [ -n ] [ -q ] [ -r ] [ -v ] [ -c count ] [ -p pattern] [ -s packetsize ] [ -t timeout] host
Syntax Description
-c Count of times that the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets is sent, ranging 1~4294967295. -d Set socket to DEBUG mode. -n Use the host parameter as the IP address without domain name resolution. -p Pattern, ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet filling bit, in the hex format. For example, -p ff fills all packets with ff. -q No other detailed information but statistics is shown. -R Recording routes. -r Transmitting Echo-Request packets directly to the connected network without route selection. -s The size of the ECHO-REQUEST packet (exclusive of the IP and ICMP headers), counting in bytes. -t Timeout after the ECHO-REQUEST is sent, the timeout waiting for ECHORESPONSE , counting in ms. -v Showing other non-ECHO-RESPONSE ICMP packets. host Name or IP address of the destination host.
Default
If not specified, the above parameters are as follows: Count of times that the ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent: 5 times. Socket: non-DEBUG mode. Host: regarded as an IP address first; if it is not an IP address, then it needs to undergo domain name resolution. Filling method: starting from 0x01, and gradually increasing until 0x09; then repeat. All information including statistics are shown. No route recorded.
5-3
Chapter 5
ECHO-REQUEST is sent through route selection. The packet size of the ECHO-REQUEST packet is 56 bytes. The timeout for waiting for the ECHO-RESPONSE packet is 2000ms. Non-ECHO-RESPONSE ICMP packets not shown.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
While the ping is executed, the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent to the destination. If network connection to the destination works normally, then after the destination host receives the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST, it will acknowledge receipt of the ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet to the source host. The ping command is used to test if network connection is faulty or if the network has line quality trouble. Its output information includes: Reply of the destination host to every ECHO-REQUEST packet. If no reply packet is received within the timeout limit, Request timeout will be output, otherwise the system will show the count of bytes, sequence number, TTL reply time, etc. of the reply packet. Final statistics, including the count of packets sent, count of reply packet received, percentage of packets unanswered, and minimum, maximum and average values of the reply time. If the network transmits at a low speed, the reply packet timeout value can be increased appropriately.
Example
! Check if the host whose IP address is 202.38.160.244 is reachable. Quidway# ping 202.38.160.244
ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 --202.38.160.244 ping statistics-5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms sequence=1 sequence=2 sequence=3 sequence=4 sequence=5 ttl=255 ttl=255 ttl=255 ttl=255 ttl=255 time time time time time = = = = = 1ms 2ms 1ms 3ms 2ms
Related Command
tracert
5.2.2 ping ipx

To check if IPX network connection and host are reachable, use the ping ipx command. ping ipx [ -n ] [ -v ] N.H.H.H [ count [ , timeout [ , pscketsize ] ] ]
5-4
Chapter 5
Syntax Description
-n Standard Novell reply mode used. -v Showing detailed information. N.H.H.H Network address of the remote host. count Times that the IPX ping request packet is sent. timeout Timeout value waiting for the IPX ping reply packet, counting in seconds. packetsize Size of the IPX ping request packet.
Default
If not specified, the above parameters are as follows: Count of times that the IPX ping request packet is sent: 5 times. Timeout for the IPX ping reply packet: 2s. The size of the IPX ping request packet: 100 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The ping ipx command can be used to test if the IPX network is faulty. The output information includes: Reply to each IPX ping request packet from the destination. If no reply packet is received within the timeout limit, then ! is output, otherwise . is shown. Final statistics, including the count of packets sent, count of reply packets received, percentage of packets unanswered, the minimum, maximum and average values.
Example
! Check if the host whose IPX address is 2.0.0c91.f61f is reachable. Quidway# ping ipx 2.0.0c91.f61f
Press CTRL_C to break Sending 5, 100-byte IPX Echoes to 2.0.0c91.f61f, timeout is 2 seconds !!!!! --2.0.0c91.f61f IPX ping statistics-5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms
5.2.3 tracert
To test if the gateways through which a data packet goes from the source host to the destination host are unreachable, use the tracert command. tracert [ -f first_TTL ] [ -m max_TTL ] [ -p port ] [ -q nqueries ] [ -w timeout ] host
Syntax Description
-f To test if the f switch is correct. first_TTL Specifies the first TTL, ranging 0 to maximum TTL.
5-5
Chapter 5
-m To test if the m switch is correct. max_TTL Specifies a maximum TTL, which is more than the initial TTL. -p To test if the p switch is correct. port The port number of the destination host, which is an integer. Generally, you does not have to modify this item. -q To test if the q switch is correct. nqueries The count of test data packets sent each time, which is an integer and more than 0. -w To test if the wf switch is correct. timeout Specifies the timeout value for the IP packet in the second, which is an integer and more than 0. host IP address of the destination host.
Default
If not specified, the parameters are as follows: first_TTL: 1. max_TTL: 30. port: 33434. nqueries: 3. timeout: 5s.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Process of executing the tracert command is as follows. First, send a data packet whose TTL is 1, so the first hop feeds back a ICMP error message indicating that this data packet can not be sent (for TTL timeout). Then this data packet is retransmitted with TTL as 2, again the second hop feeds a TTL timeout message. This process goes on and on until the packet reaches the destination. The purpose of executing these processes is to record the source address for each ICMP TTL timeout message, providing the path through which an IP packet goes before reaching the destination. After identifying a fault with the network through the ping command, you can locate the fault via the tracert command. The information output through the tracert command includes the IP addresses of all the gateways through which an IP packet goes before reaching the destination. If a gateway is timeout, then output ***. It is mainly used to check if network connection is reachable, and analyze where the network is faulty.
Example
! Test if the gateways through which a data packet goes from the source host to the destination host whose IP address is 18.26.0.115 are unreachable.
5-6
Chapter 5
Quidway# tracert 18.26.0.115

traceroute to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max 1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms 3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms 4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms 5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms 6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms 7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms 8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms 9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms 10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms 11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms 12 * * * 13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms 14 * * * 15 * * * 16 * * * 17 * * * 18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms
5.3 Log Commands

Log commands include: logging on logging console logging buffered logging monitor logging host show logging
5.3.1 logging on
To start the log function, use the logging on command. Use the no form of this command to shut down the log function. logging on no logging on
Default
Log function shut down.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Only after the log system is started via this log command can log information be output to the Console, Telnet terminal, dummy terminal, buffer in the router, and log host.
Example
! Shut down the log function. Quidway(config)# no logging on
5-7
Chapter 5
Related Command
show logging
5.3.2 logging console

To turn on the log output switch in the Console direction, use the logging console command. Use the no form of this command to shut down the log output in the Console direction. logging console [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | ]] warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 no logging console [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | ]] warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2
Default
The language for display is English and, The seriousness-level threshold is informational and information is not filtered based on the module.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to start (or close) log output in the Console direction and set the corresponding control parameter.
Example
Example 1: ! Enable output of log information, where the seriousness level of the PPP module ranges from emergencies to debugging. Quidway(config)# logging console Chinese debugging filter ppp Example 2: !Disable the module-based filter function, that is, enable output of log information from all the modules. Quidway(config)# no logging console filter
Related Command
show logging, show running-config
5-8
Chapter 5
5.3.3 logging buffered

To turn on the log output switch in the buffer direction, use the logging buffered command. Use the no form of this command to disable log output in the buffer direction. logging buffered [ size ] [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ]] no logging buffered [ size ] [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 ]] facility2
Default
The buffer size is 200, language for display is English, seriousness-level threshold is informational, and no information filtering based on the module.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
A buffer is allocated in the Quidway router to save a certain amount of log information. When the count of logs exceeds the buffer size, the initial part of log information will be covered.
Example
! Configure the log parameter in the buffer direction, only enabling the saving of log information whose seriousness levels range from emergencies to errors in the buffer. Quidway(config)# logging buffered errors
Related Command
show logging , show running-config
5.3.4 logging monitor

To turn off the log output switch in the Console direction, use the logging monitor command. Use the no form of this command to disable the log output in the Console direction. logging monitor [ all ] [ English | Chinese] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ]] no logging monitor [ all ] [ English | Chinese] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ]]
Default
The language for display is English.
5-9
Chapter 5
The seriousness-level threshold is informational. Information is not filtered based on the module.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to configure log output to the remote Telnet terminal, which can be used for remote debug. The parameter all is used in no logging monitor all only, indicating that the log system is disabled to send log information to any Telnet or dummy terminal. no logging monitor indicates that the log system is disabled to send log information to the local terminal.
Example
Example 1: ! Enable output of hdlc module information from the current telnet terminal or dummy terminal. Quidway(config)# logging monitor filter hdlc Chinese Example 2: ! Disable log output in the telnet or dummy terminal. Quidway(config)# no logging monitor all
Related Command
show logging , show running-config
5.3.5 logging host

To turn on the log output switch in the log host direction, use the logging host command. Use the no form of this command to disable the log output in the log host direction. | local7 ] [ English | Chinese ] logging host < 0-9 > ip-address [ local0 | [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | ]] debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 no logging host < 0-9 > ip-address [ local0 | | local7 ] [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational | ]] debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2
Default
The facility name is local7. The language for display is English. The seriousness-level threshold is informational. Information is not filtered based on the module.
5-10
Chapter 5
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to configure the log host. The log system can send log packets to the hosts according to the configuration list, with a protocol number of 514. While using this command, try not to configure too many log hosts so as to avoid affecting the routers performance negatively.
Example
! Use a computer whose IP address is 10.110.200.200, and turn on the switch outputting log information to it. Quidway(config)# logging host 0 10.110.200.200 filter hdlc English informational
Related Command
show logging, show running-config
5.3.6 show logging

To show the configuration information for the log system or recording the information in the buffer in the router, use the show logging command. show logging [ buffered ]
Command Mode
Privileged user mode and global configuration mode
Usage Guideline
show logging is used to show the control parameter of the log system and the statistics of log packets sent. show logging buffered is used to show the log information saved in the buffer in the router.
Example
Example 1: ! Show the current log configuration information. Quidway(config)# show logging
Syslog logging: enable(0 messages logged,0 messages dropped). Console logging: level debugging,language English,filter off,0 messages logged. Monitor logging: level informational,language English,filter off,0 messages logged. Host logging: HostName IPAddress Facility Severity Filter Language Logged host0 10.110.201.103 local7 informational off English 0 Buffer logging: size 200,level informational,language English,filter off,0 messages logged.
Example 2:
5-11
Chapter 5
! Show the log information saved in the buffer in the router. Quidway(config)# show logging buffered
%01:19:38-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State starting, code ConfReq(01), id 21, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 322a0100 % Interface Serial2:0 changed state to UP %01:19:40-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP I LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State reqsent, code ConfReq(01), id 6, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 0000d32d %01:19:41-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State reqsent, code ConfAck(02), id 6, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 0000d32d % Line protocol ip on interface Serial2:0, changed state to UP %01:19:41-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State acksent, code ConfReq(01), id 22, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 85670100
Related Command
show running-config
5-12
HUAWEI
VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1 02 Interface Configuration (IC)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Interface Management Commands ........................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Interface Management Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 clear port ................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 description .............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.1.3 flow-interval ............................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.4 shutdown ................................................................................................................ 1-4 1.1.5 show interface ........................................................................................................ 1-5 Chapter 2 Basic Configuration Commands for LAN Interface ................................................ 2-1 2.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Ethernet Interface .................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 duplex..................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 loopback ................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.3 mtu ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.4 send-frame-type ..................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5 speed...................................................................................................................... 2-4 Chapter 3 Basic Configuration Commands for WAN Interface ............................................... 3-1 3.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Serial Interfaces....................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 async mode ............................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1.2 baudrate ................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.1.3 clock-select............................................................................................................. 3-3 3.1.4 databits................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.5 detect dsr-dtr .......................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.6 flowcontrol .............................................................................................................. 3-6 3.1.7 invert transmit-clock ............................................................................................... 3-7 3.1.8 loopback ................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.9 mtu ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.1.10 nrzi-encoding........................................................................................................ 3-9 3.1.11 parity..................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.1.12 physical-layer ..................................................................................................... 3-10 3.1.13 stopbits ............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.2 Basic Configuration Commands for cE1/PRI Interface................................................... 3-11 3.2.1 channel-group ...................................................................................................... 3-12 3.2.2 clock ..................................................................................................................... 3-12 3.2.3 framing ................................................................................................................. 3-13 3.2.4 linecode ................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.2.5 loopback ............................................................................................................... 3-14 3.2.6 pri-group ............................................................................................................... 3-15 3.2.7 using..................................................................................................................... 3-16
i
Table of Contents
3.2.8 show controller ..................................................................................................... 3-17
ii
Chapter 1
Interface Management Commands
Chapter 1 Interface Management Commands

1.1 Interface Management Commands
Interface management commands applicable to all interfaces include: clear port description flow-interval shutdown show interface
1.1.1 clear port

To clear the statistics of received and transmitted packets for an interface, use the clear port command. clear port [ interface-type interface-number ]
Syntax Description
interface-type Type of the interface to be configured. It specifies an interface together with interface-number. interface-number The number of the interface. It specifies an interface together with interface-type.
Default
If no interface is specified, then the statistics of received and transmitted packets at all the interfaces will be cleared by default.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some circumstances, it is necessary to keep statistics of the traffic at a certain interface. Now it is necessary to clear the existing statistics of received and transmitted packets at this interface so that new statistics can be kept at this interface.
Example
! Clear the statistics of received and transmitted packets at Serial 0. Quidway# clear port serial0
Related Command
show interface, flow-interval
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.2 description
To specify a description of an interface, use the description command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default description. description interface-description no description
Syntax Description
interface-description Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to the interface, up to 80 characters.
Default
Quidway RSeries Router, xxxxxx interface
Command Mode
Interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
This command is only used to identify an interface and does not have special meaning and usage.
Example
! Set the Ethernet interface description as QuidwayR3680 ethernet interface. Quidway# config Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# description Quidway R3680 ethernet interface ! Press < Ctrl+Z > to return to privilege exec. Show the current configuration and state of Ethernet interface 0. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# Quidway# show interface ethernet 0
Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware address is 00-e0-fc-00-00-00 Auto-Negotiation is enabled, Duplex AUTO, Speed AUTO Internet address is 10.111.0.8 255.255.0.0 10.111.255.255 Description: Quidway R3680 ethernet interface IP Sending Frames' Format is Ethernet_II the Maximum Transmission Unit is 1500
! Restore the default configuration of Ethernet interface0 Quidway# config Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# no description ! Return to privileged exec
1-2
Chapter 1
Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# exit Quidway(config)# exit ! Show the current configuration and state of Ethernet interface 0. Quidway(config)# show interface ethernet 0
Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware address is 00-e0-fc-00-00-00 Auto-Negotiation is enabled, Duplex AUTO, Speed AUTO Internet address is 10.111.0.8 255.255.0.0 10.111.255.255 Description: Quidway Router, ethernet interface IP Sending Frames' Format is Ethernet_II the Maximum Transmission Unit is 1500
The function of this command can be seen from the difference among the terminal information displayed above.
Related Command
show interface
1.1.3 flow-interval
To set the interval time for counting of traffic at all interfaces, use the flow-interval command. flow-interval interval-time
Syntax Description
interval-time Time interval for each counting of traffic at all interfaces, in minutes. Ranging 1 to 10 minutes.
Default
5 minutes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The system keeps a statistic of traffic every time interval to calculate traffic per time unit for sake of reference. This parameter interval-time is needed in other flow control methods (including dialer threshold command). This command is used to set the time interval for each counting of traffic at all interfaces.
Example
! Set the time interval for counting of traffic at all interfaces to 2 minutes. Quidway(config)# flow-interval 2
1-3
Chapter 1
Related Command
show interface, clear port
1.1.4 shutdown
To disable an interface, use the shutdown command. Use the no form of this command to restart a disabled interface. shutdown no shutdown
Default
All interfaces are enabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some circumstances such as modifying the working parameter of a certain interface, the modification can not take effect immediately. It is necessary to shut down and restart the interface before the modification can take effect.
Note: This command will directly lead to change in the status of the interface, so be cautious when using this command.
Example
! Shut down Ethernet interface 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# shutdown
% Interface Ethernet0 is shutdown Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# % Interface Ethernet0 changed state to DOWN % Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0, changed state to DOWN
! Reset Ethernet interface 0

% Interface Ethernet0 is reset Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# % Interface Ethernet0 changed state to UP % Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0, changed state to UP
Related Command
show interface
1-4
Chapter 1
1.1.5 show interface

To display the statistics of an interface, use the show interface command. show interface interface-type interface-number
Syntax Description
interface-type Type of the interface to be configured. It specifies an interface together with interface-number. interface-number The number of the interface. It specifies an interface together with interface-type.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If this command was used, such following information can be shown: The physical status and protocol status of the interface Physical features of the interface (sync/async, DTE/DCE, clock selection, external cable, etc.) IP address of the interface The run states, statistics, etc. of the link-layer protocols encapsulated at the interface Statistics of input and output packets at the interface You will use the show interfaces command frequently while configuring and monitoring devices, and you can keep statistics of traffic and perform interface diagnosis based on such information.
Example
! Display the statistics of Serial 0 (with PPP encapsulated). Quidway# show interface serial 0
Serial0 is up, line protocol is up physical layer is synchronous interface is DTE, clock is DTECLK1, cable type is V35 Internet address is 10.3.0.158 255.255.255.252 Encapsulation is PPP LCP opened, IPCP opened, IPXCP disabled Output queue 30/0, 33081 drops; Input queue 30/1, 0 drops. 5 minutes input rate 1288.14 bytes/sec, 4.97 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 3077.11 bytes/sec, 4.94 packets/sec 997074 packets input, 485012871 bytes, 0 no buffers 1825361 packets output, 542976191 bytes, 0 no buffers 1171945 input errors, 437713 CRC, 504161 frame errors 0 overrunners, 230071 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffers
Related Command
clear port
1-5
Chapter 2
Basic Configuration Commands for LAN Interface
Chapter 2 Basic Configuration Commands for LAN Interface

The LAN interface supported by VRP is an Ethernet interface. So the basic configuration commands for the LAN interface refer to those for the Ethernet interface.
2.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Ethernet Interface

The basic configuration commands for the Ethernet interface include: duplex loopback mtu send-frame-type speed The speed command is valid in the Ethernet interface configuration only. For more configuration commands such as the command for configuring the network protocol address, please consult Network Protocol Configuration of this manual.
2.1.1 duplex
To configure the operating mode on 10Base-T interface or 100Base-TX fast Ethernet interface, use the duplex command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. The duplex and no duplex command are applicable for the 10Base-T Ethernet interface. The duplex {auto | full | half} and no duplex command are applicable for the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface. duplex no duplex duplex {auto | full | half} no duplex
Syntax Description
auto Specifies the auto negotiation capability. The interface automatically operates at half or full duplex, depending on environmental factors, such as the type of media and transmission speeds for the peer routers, hubs, and switches used in the network configuration. full Specifies full-duplex operation. half Specifies half-duplex operation.
Default
Half duplex for the 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Duplex auto for the 100Base-T Ethernet interface.
2-1
Chapter 2
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For the 10Base-T Ethernet interface, duplex is used to set the Ethernet interface to work in full duplex, and no duplex is used to restore the Ethernet interface to half duplex which is its default working mode. For the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface, duplex full makes it work in full duplex and duplex half makes it work in half duplex while duplex auto sets it to work in duplex auto. When a routers Ethernet interface is connected with a hub, it should work in half duplex. And it should work in full duplex when its Ethernet interface is connected with a network equipment supporting full duplex such as LAN Switch and when the opposite equipment is set to full duplex. When the fast Ethernet interface is set to duplex auto, its remote end must work in the same mode. If this can not be achieved, then use forced setting to ensure consistency in the working mode. Executing speed auto after executing duplex {full | half} at the fast Ethernet interface will restore the working mode to duplex auto. This will automatically start the duplex auto process and negotiate the speed and working mode.
Example
Example 1: ! Set the 10Base-T Ethernet interface to work in full duplex Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# duplex Example 2: ! Set the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface to work in full duplex Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# duplex full
Related Command
speed, show interface
2.1.2 loopback
To diagnose equipment malfunctions between interfaces and devices, use the loopback command. The no form of this command disables the test. loopback no loopback
Default
Loopback disabled.
2-2
Chapter 2
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The Ethernet interface is set to loopback mode only when some special functions are tested.
Example
! Configures the loopback test on the Ethernet interface. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# loopback
2.1.3 mtu
To adjust the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, use the mtu command. Use the no form of this command to restore the MTU value to its original default value. mtu number no mtu
Syntax Description
number Desired size of the Ethernet interfaces MTU in bytes. When the Ethernet II frame type is adopted, it ranges 46 to 1500. When the Ethernet SNAP frame type is adopted, it ranges 46 to 1492.
Default
1500 when Ethernet_II is adopted and, 1492 when Ethernet_SNAP is adopted.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The MTU of the Ethernet interface only affects the fragmentation and reassembling of IP datagrams on the Ethernet interface.
Example
! Set the MTU of the Ethernet interface to 1492. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# mtu 1492
Related Command
send-frame-type, show interface
2-3
Chapter 2
2.1.4 send-frame-type
To set the IP datagram send frame type for the Ethernet interface, use the sendframe-type command. Use the no form of this command to restore to the default IP datagram send frame type. send-frame-type { Ethernet_II | Ethernet_SNAP } no send-frame-type
Syntax Description
Ethernet_II Ethernet_II frame type is adopted. Ethernet_SNAP Ethernet_SNAP frame type is adopted.
Default
Ethernet_II.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The Ethernet interface of the Quidway series of routers supports the following four frame types: Ethernet_II Ethernet_SNAP 802.2 802.3 Ethernet_II and Ethernet_SNAP frame type support IP protocol, and all four types support IPX. The Ethernet interface can auto-discriminate the types of frames received, so it can receive packets of multiple frame types concurrently. But it can send packets of one single frame type at the same time only.
Example
! Set the send frame type for the Ethernet interface to Ethernet_SNAP. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# send-frame-type Ethernet_SNAP
Related Command
mtu, show interface
2.1.5 speed
To configure the speed for a Fast Ethernet interface, use the speed interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default operating speed. This command is only effective for fast Ethernet interface. speed { auto | 100 | 10 } no speed
2-4
Chapter 2
Syntax Description
10 Set the interface to transmit at 10 Mbps. 100 Set the interface to transmit at 100 Mbps. auto Turn on the Fast Ethernet auto-negotiation capability. The interface automatically operates at 10 or 100 Mbps depending on environmental factors, such as the type of media and transmission speeds for the peer routers, hubs, and switches used in the network configuration.
Default
Speed auto.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is valid only when configured at the fast Ethernet interface. While setting the fast Ethernet interface to speed auto, you must set its remote end to work in the same mode. If this can not be achieved, then use forced setting to ensure consistency in the working mode. Executing speed auto after executing speed {10 | 100 } at the fast Ethernet interface will restore the working mode to speed auto. This will automatically start the duplex auto process and negotiate the speed and working mode.
Example
! Set the fast Ethernet interface to transmit at 10Mbps. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# speed 10
Related Command
duplex, show interface
2-5
Chapter 3
Basic Configuration Commands for WAN Interface
Chapter 3 Basic Configuration Commands for WAN Interface

In VRP, WAN interfaces include the serial interfaces, the ISDN BRI interface and the cE1/PRI interface. This chapter describes the basic configuration commands for the serial interface and the cE1/PRI interface only. For those for the ISDN BRI interface, please consult Dialup Configuration in this manual.
3.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Serial Interfaces

The basic configuration commands for the serial interfaces include: async mode baudrate clock-select databits detect dsr-dtr enable flowcontrol invert transmit-clock loopback mtu nazi-encoding parity physical-layer stopbits
3.1.1 async mode

To set the working mode of the asynchronous serial interface, use the async mode command. async mode { dedicate | interactive | tty }
Syntax Description
dedicate Dedicate mode. interactive Interactive mode, which is also called the flow mode. tty Terminal Server mode
Default
Dedicate mode.
Command Mode
Serial interface configuration mode
3-1
Chapter 3
Usage Guideline
The asynchronous serial interface can work in either of the following modes: Dedicate mode. After the setup of a physical connection, the existing link-layer protocol configuration parameters are directly used to set up a link. Interactive mode. After a successful dialup process, both ends of the link interact with each other. The calling end sends configuration commands to the called end (this can achieve the same effect as by entering configuration commands manually and remotely). The link-layer protocol parameters at the called end are set, and then a link is set up. This mode applies for man-machine interaction situations such as the dummy end and dialup. This mode can be used together with such commands as modem script and autocommand. Terminal server mode (Tty): when the asynchronous serial port of the router is used in terminal server, the number of virtual terminal and physical terminal can be set by this keyword and related parameters. For detailed setting, refer to Chapter 3 Terminal Service Command in the first fascicle Fundamental Configuration of this manual.
Example
! Set the asynchronous serial interface to work at the interactive mode. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# async mode interactive
Related Command
modem, chat-script, autocommand
3.1.2 baudrate
To set the baud rate for the serial interface, use the baudrate command. baudrate baudrate
Syntax Description
baudrate Baud rate for the serial port, in bps. Ranging 300 to 115200 bps for asynchronous serial port and 1200 to 2048000 bps for synchronous serial port.
Default
9600bps for the asynchronous serial interface and, 64000bps for the synchronous serial interface. The synchronous and asynchronous serial modes support different ranges of baud rates, so if the current working mode does not support the original baud rate in the case of synchronous/asynchronous switching, change the baud rate to the default baud rate in the current working mode.
Command Mode
3-2
Chapter 3
Usage Guideline
The asynchronous serial interface supports the following baud rates: 300bps 600bps 1200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps And the synchronous serial interface supports the following baud rates: 1200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 64000bps 72000bps 115200bps 128000bps 384000bps 2048000bps In addition, the synchronous serial interface supports different ranges of baud rates depending on different physical and electric rules. V.24DTE/DCE: 1200bps 64000bps V.35DCE/DCE, X.21DTE/DCE, EIA/TIA-449DTE/DCE, and EIA-530DTE /DCE: 1200bps 2048000bps While setting the baud rate for the serial interface, it is necessary to pay attention to such factors as the sync/async modes of the serial interface and the electric rules for the external cable. In addition, it is necessary to note that the baud rate for the asynchronous interface works between the router and the Modem only and that between Modems need to be determined through negotiation between them. So in asynchronous mode, the baud rates of routers at both sides can be set to different values. In synchronous mode, the router at the DCE side decides the baud rate for line transmission, and you just need to set it at the DCE side.
Example
! Set the baud rate at the serial interface to 115200bps. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# baudrate 115200
Related Command
physical-layer
3.1.3 clock-select
To set the clock selection mode of the synchronous serial interface, use the clockselect command. clock-select { DCEclk | DTEclk1 | DTEclk2 | DTEclk3 | DTEclk4 }
3-3
Chapter 3
Default
DCEclk (providing clock for DTE) for DCE. DTEclk3 for DTE.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The synchronous serial interface works in two modes: DTE and DCE. Different working modes lead to different clock selection methods.
TxClk DCE RxClk DTE
Figure IC-3-1 Clock selection on the sync serial interface TxClk stands for transmitting clock and RxClk for receiving clock. If the synchronous serial interface acts as the DCE, it is necessary to provide clock for the opposite DTE. So you need to select DCEclk. If the synchronous serial interface acts as the DTE and receives the clock provided by the opposite DCE and because the TX and RX clocks of the synchronous equipment are independent, the RX clock of the DTE can be either of the TX and RX clocks for the DCE, and the TX clock for the DTE can be either of the DCEs TX and RX clocks. So this gives rise to four clock combinations, that is, four clocks are available for selection at the DTE side. These four selection methods are specified as in the following table. Table IC-3-1 Clock selection methods at the serial interface DTE side
Selection method DTEclk1 DTEclk2 DTEclk3 DTEclk4 Meanings TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = RxClk TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = TxClk TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = TxClk TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = RxClk
In the above table, TxClk stands for the transmitting clock and RxClk for the receiving clock. The DTE side clock is before = while the DCE side clock is after =.
Example
! Set the clock selection method for the synchronous serial interface as the DTE to DTEclk2. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# clock-select DTEclk2
3-4
Chapter 3
Related Command
physical-layer
3.1.4 databits
To set the data bit length of link layer protocol when asynchronous serial port works in interactive or terminal server mode, use the databits command. databits { 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 }
Syntax Description
5 5 data bits 6 6 data bits 7 7 data bits 8 8 data bits
Default
The length of the data bits is set to 8 when asynchronous serial port operates in interactive mode or terminal server mode.
Command Mode
Asynchronous serial port config mode
Usage Guideline
When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode, the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sends configuration command and operating parameters of link layer to terminal. The data bit has to be set if the data bit of the terminal is not 8, as in terminal server.
Example
! Set the data bit to 6 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# databits 6
Related Command
parity, stopbits
3.1.5 detect dsr-dtr

To enable the level detection on the serial interface, use the detect dsr-dtr command. Use the no form of this command to disable this detection. detect dsr-dtr no detect dsr-dtr
3-5
Chapter 3
Default
Level detection disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If no detect dsr-dtr is set, then the system will only check if the serial interface is connected with the external cable, and will automatically report to the user the UP and DOWN states of the serial interface. If detect dsr-dtr is set, then the system will not only check if the serial interface is connected with the external cable, but also detect the DSR signal (it is necessary to detect the DCD signal when the serial interface works in sync mode). Only when this signal is valid, will the system determine this serial interface is UP, otherwise it will determine that the interface is DOWN.
Example
! Disable the level detection at the serial interface. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# no detect dsr-dtr
3.1.6 flowcontrol
To set the flowcontrol method of the asynchronous interface, use the flowcontrol command. flowcontrol { normal | auto }
Syntax Description
Please refer to the Usage Guideline below.
Default
auto method for the asynchronous serial interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the serial interface sets up a link in interactive mode, there are two flow control methods hardware flow control and software flow control. In Hardware flow control, data sending on the asynchronous serial port is controlled by hardware signal. While sending data, the serial interface auto-detects the CTS signal. It will normally send the data when a CTS signal is detected; otherwise it stops sending the CTS signal. In software flow control, data sending on the asynchronous serial port is controlled by software signal. On receipt of the flow control character XOFF (0x13), the async serial interface will shut down data sending on local interface; on receipt of the flow control character XON (0x11), it will start data sending of local interface.
3-6
Chapter 3
If the flow control method is set to normal, the asynchronous serial interface will only start software flow control. If the flow control method is set to auto, the interface will start hardware flow control and software flow control.
Example
! Set the flowcontrol method of the asynchronous serial interface to normal. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# flowcontrol normal
Related Command
physical-layer
3.1.7 invert transmit-clock

To enable the invert transmit clock on the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side, use the invert transmit-clock command. Use the no form of this command to disable the invert transmit-clock. invert transmit-clock no invert transmit-clock
Default
Invert transmit-clock disabled when the synchronous serial interface acts as the DTE side equipment.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some circumstances, the transmit clock on the serial interface of the DTE side is inverted to eliminate the delay for half a clock cycle. This command is only valid for some clock signals provided by some special DCE. The transmit clock should not be inverted for normal applications.
Example
! Invert the transmit clock on the DTE side serial interface. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# invert transmit-clock
Related Command
physical-layer, clock-select
3.1.8 loopback
To allow loopback on Ethernet interface, use the loopback command. The no form of this command disables the test. loopback
3-7
Chapter 3
no loopback
Default
Loopback disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The serial interface is set to have loopback test only when some special functions are tested.
Example
! Configures the loopback test on the serial interface. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# loopback
3.1.9 mtu
To adjust the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of the serial interface, use the mtu command. Use the no form of this command to restore the MTU value to its original default value. mtu number no mtu
Syntax Description
number Desired size of the serial interfaces mtu which is counted in bytes. Ranging 128 to 1500 with default value being 1500.
Default
1500 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The MTU at the serial interface affects the fragmentation and reassembling of IP datagrams on this interface.
Example
! Set the MTU of the serial interface to 1200. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# mtu 1200
3-8
Chapter 3
3.1.10 nrzi-encoding
Use the nrzi-encoding command to enable NRZI (non-return-to-zero inverted) linecoding format. Use the no form of this command to enable NRZ (non-return-to-zero) line-coding format. nrzi-encoding no nrzi-encoding
Default
NRZ line-coding format.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
There are two line-coding formats: NRZI and NRZ.
Example
! Configure synchronous serial interface for NRZI coding. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# nrzi-encoding
3.1.11 parity
Set the checking method of link layer protocol on asynchronous serial port under interactive or terminal server mode. parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }
Syntax Description
even Even parity. mark Mark parity. none No parity. odd Odd parity. space Space parity.
Default
No parity.
Command Mode
3-9
Chapter 3
Usage Guideline
When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode, the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sends configuration command and operating parameters of link layer to the terminal. The parity method should be set if default none does not apply to the terminal (e.g., in terminal server).
Example
! Set the checking method to even parity Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# parity even
Related Command
databits, stopbits
3.1.12 physical-layer
To set the working mode of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface, use the physical-layer command. physical-layer { sync | async }
Syntax Description
Please refer to the Usage Guideline below.
Default
sync for the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The working mode of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface is decided by its application environment. If the working mode at the synchronous/asynchronous needs to be decided according to its application environment. If external Modems (or ISDN TA) are interconnected through the PSTN (or ISDN), then the async mode should be selected; if external CSU/DSUs are interconnected via the DDN, then the sync mode should be selected.
Example
! Set the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work as an asynchronous serial interface. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# physical-layer async
3-10
Chapter 3
3.1.13 stopbits
To set the length of the stopbits of link layer protocol on async serial port in interactive or terminal server mode, use the command stopbits. stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }
Syntax Description
1 1 stopbit 1.5 1.5 stopbits 2 2 stopbits
Default
1 stopbit in interactive mode or terminal server mode.
Command Mode
Asynchronous serial port configuration mode
Usage Guideline
When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode, the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sends configuration command and operating parameters of link layer to the terminal. The stopbit length should be set if the default 1 does not apply to the terminal (e.g., in terminal server).
Example
! Set the stopbit length of async serial port to 2 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# stopbits 2
Related Command
parity, databits
3.2 Basic Configuration Commands for cE1/PRI Interface

The basic configuration commands for the cE1/PRI interface include: channel-group clock framing linecode loopback pri-group show controller using
3-11
Chapter 3
3.2.1 channel-group
To bind the timeslots on the cE1/PRI interface to channel-group, use the channelgroup command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the existing binding. channel-group channel-group timeslots {number | number1-number2} [,number | number1-number2...] no channel-group channel-group
Syntax Description
channel-group Channel-group number on the cE1/PRI interface, ranging 0 to 30. number timeslot number, ranging 1 to 31. When the bound timeslot is specified, a single timeslot number can be specified, or the timeslot range number1-number2 can be specified.
Default
No channel-group bound.
Command Mode
cE1/PRI interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
In cE1/PRI working mode, the cE1/PRI interface is divided into 32 timeslots physically, corresponding to numbers 0 to 31. All the timeslots except slot 0 can be randomly divided into channel-groups. Each bound timeslot group acts as an interface. It has the same logical features as those of the sync interface, supporting such link-layer protocols as PPP, frame relay, LAPB, and X.25 as well as network protocols like IP and IPX.
Example
! Bind the cE1/PRI interfaces timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15 and 18 to channel-group 1. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# channel-group 1 timeslots 1,2,5,10-15,18
Related Command
pri-group
3.2.2 clock
To select the working clock on the cE1/PRI interface, use the clock command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the existing clock setting and restore to the clock by default. clock { DCE | lineclock } no clock
3-12
Chapter 3
Syntax Description
DCE DCE clock. lineclock DTE clock, which is also called line clock.
Default
DTE clock (also called line clock) for the cE1/PRI interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the cE1/PRI acts as a synchronous interface, it can also work in DTE or DCE mode. So it is necessary to select the line clock. When the cE1/PRI interfaces of two routers are interconnected, the two ends should work in different modes. When the routers cE1/PRI interface is connected with the switch, the switch works in DCE mode and the router in DTE mode. The cE1/PRI interface of the router needs to work in the DTE mode.
Example
! Select the DCE clock as the cE1/PRI interfaces working clock. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# clock DCEf
Related Command
channel-group, pri-group
3.2.3 framing
To set the frame check type on cE1/PRI, use the framing command. Use the no form of this command to remove the existing configuration and restore to the default frame check type. framing { crc4 | no-crc4 }
Syntax Description
crc4 Specifies CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type. no-crc4 Specifies no CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type.
Default
No frame check for the E1 frame type on the cE1/PRI interface.
Command Mode
3-13
Chapter 3
Usage Guideline
The cE1/PRI interface supports CRC 4 for the physical frame.
Example
! Specify CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# framing crc4
3.2.4 linecode
To select the line-code type for cE1/PRI Interface, use the linecode command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default line-code type. linecode { ami | hdb3 } no linecode
Syntax Description
ami Specifies alternate mark inversion (AMI) as the line-code type. hdb3 Specifies high-density bipolar 3 (HDB3) as the line-code type.
Default
HDB3 for E1 lines.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Use this command in configurations where the router or access server must communicate with E1 data lines. The E1 service provider determines which line-code type, either AMI or HDB3, is required for your E1 circuit.
Example
! Set the E1 line-code type to AMI Quidway#(config-if-E1-0)# linecode ami
3.2.5 loopback
To loop packets back to the cE1/PRI interface, use the loopback command. Use the no form of this command to disables loopback. loopback no loopback
3-14
Chapter 3
Default
loopback disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The cE1/PRI interface is set to have loopback test only when some special functions are tested.
Example
! Configures the loopback test on the cE1/PRI interface. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# loopback
3.2.6 pri-group
To specify ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) on a cE1/PRI interface, use the prigroup command. Use the no form of this command to remove the ISDN PRI. pri-group [ timeslots { number | number1-number2 } [ ,number | number1number2 ... ] ] no pri-group
Syntax Description
number Timeslot number, ranging 1 to 31. While specifying the bound timeslot, you specify a single number, or the timeslot range number1-number2.
Note: Timeslot 16 is used to carry signaling, so it can not serve as a bind timeslot.
Default
No pri-group specified.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When this command is executed in cE1/PRI working mode, the cE1/PRI interface can only bind the timeslots to a pri-group. It has the same logical features as those of the ISDN dialup interface. It supports the link-layer protocols such as PPP and network protocols like IP and IPX. And it can be used to configure such parameters as DDR.
3-15
Chapter 3
The fixed pri-group number is 15.
Example
! Bind timeslots 1, 2, 8-12 on the cE1/PRI interface. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# pri-group timeslots 1,2,8-12
Related Command
channel-group, using
3.2.7 using
To activate E1 or cE1/PRI working mode of the cE1/PRI interface, use the using command. using [ e1 | ce1 ]
Syntax Description
e1 E1 working mode. ce1 cE1/PRI working mode.
Default
cE1/PRI working mode activated on the cE1/PRI interface.
Command Mode
cE1/PRI interface configuration mode.
Usage Guideline
When switched to E1, the cE1/PRI interface acts as a 2Mbps interface not divided into timeslots. It has the same logical features as those at the sync serial interface. When switched to cE1/PRI, the cE1/PRI interface is divided into 32 timeslots physically, corresponding to numbers 0~31. There are two methods for using this interface: When serving as a cE1 interface, it can divide all the timeslots into a number of channel-groups. Each bound group of timeslots is used as an interface, which has the same logical features as does the sync serial interface. When serving as a PRI interface, timeslot 16 acts as D channel for transmitting signaling, so a pri-group can be selected randomly from the other timeslots but timeslot 16. When bound, this group acts as an interface, which has the same logical features as the ISDN dialup interface.
Example
! Activate E1 working mode of the cE1/PRI interface. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# using e1
3-16
Chapter 3
3.2.8 show controller

To display information about the E1 links, use the show controller e1 command. show controller e1 interface-number
Syntax Description
interface-number Number of the E1 interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command shows the following information: Physical status and protocol status of the E1 interface Clock mode at the E1 interface Framing mode at the E1 interface Linecode mode at the E1 interface The information displayed is generally useful for diagnostic tasks performed by technical support personnel only.
Example
! Shows the related information about the E1 links. Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# show controller e1 0
E1 0 is down. Applique type is Channelized E1 - 75 OHM unbalanced Framing is NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Source Clock is Line.
3-17
HUAWEI
VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1 03 Link Layer Protocol Configuration (LLC)
User Manual - Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 PPP and MP Commands ............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 encapsulation ppp ..................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 multilink ..................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3 multilink-user ............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.4 ppp authentication ..................................................................................................... 1-3 1.5 ppp callback .............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.6 ppp chap host............................................................................................................ 1-5 1.7 ppp chap password ................................................................................................... 1-6 1.8 ppp compression stac ............................................................................................... 1-6 1.9 ppp multilink .............................................................................................................. 1-7 1.10 ppp negotiation timeout........................................................................................... 1-8 1.11 ppp pap sent-username .......................................................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2 SLIP Commands ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 encapsulation slip...................................................................................................... 2-1 Chapter 3 ISDN Commands......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 isdn answer1 ............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 isdn answer2 ............................................................................................................. 3-2 3.3 show isdn active ........................................................................................................ 3-2 3.4 show isdn answer...................................................................................................... 3-3 3.5 show isdn status........................................................................................................ 3-4 3.6 show isdn timer ......................................................................................................... 3-5 Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands ............................................................ 4-1 4.1 clear xot..................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 encapsulation lapb .................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3 encapsulation x25 ..................................................................................................... 4-3 4.4 lapb k......................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.5 lapb modulo............................................................................................................... 4-5 4.6 lapb n1....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.7 lapb n2....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.8 lapb t1........................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.9 lapb t2........................................................................................................................ 4-8 4.10 lapb t3...................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.11 x25 accept-reverse.................................................................................................. 4-9 4.12 x25 address........................................................................................................... 4-10 4.13 x25 alias ................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.14 x25 check-response-address ................................................................................ 4-12
Table of Contents
4.15 x25 default............................................................................................................. 4-13 4.16 x25 facility.............................................................................................................. 4-13 4.17 x25 hic ................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.18 x25 hoc.................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.19 x25 hold-queue...................................................................................................... 4-17 4.20 x25 hold-vc-timer................................................................................................... 4-17 4.21 x25 htc................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.22 x25 idle .................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.23 x25 ips ................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.24 x25 lic .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.25 x25 linkrestart ........................................................................................................ 4-22 4.26 x25 loc ................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.27 x25 ltc .................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.28 x25 map................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.29 x25 modulo............................................................................................................ 4-26 4.30 x25 nvc .................................................................................................................. 4-27 4.31 x25 ops.................................................................................................................. 4-28 4.32 x25 pvc (encapsulating) ........................................................................................ 4-29 4.33 x25 pvc (switched) ................................................................................................ 4-30 4.34 x25 pvc (XOT) ....................................................................................................... 4-31 4.35 x25 response-called-address ................................................................................ 4-32 4.36 x25 response-calling-address ............................................................................... 4-33 4.37 x25 roa .................................................................................................................. 4-34 4.38 x25 route ............................................................................................................... 4-35 4.39 x25 route (XOT) .................................................................................................... 4-36 4.40 x25 routing............................................................................................................. 4-36 4.41 x25 suppress-called-address ................................................................................ 4-37 4.42 x25 suppress-calling-address ............................................................................... 4-38 4.43 x25 threshold......................................................................................................... 4-38 4.44 x25 tx0................................................................................................................... 4-39 4.45 x25 tx1................................................................................................................... 4-40 4.46 x25 tx2................................................................................................................... 4-41 4.47 x25 tx3................................................................................................................... 4-42 4.48 x25 use-source-address........................................................................................ 4-42 4.49 x25 win .................................................................................................................. 4-43 4.50 x25 wout ................................................................................................................ 4-44 4.51 show x25 alias....................................................................................................... 4-45 4.52 show x25 interface ................................................................................................ 4-45 4.53 show x25 map ....................................................................................................... 4-48 4.54 show x25 switch-vc-table ...................................................................................... 4-49 4.55 show x25 route ...................................................................................................... 4-49 4.56 show x25 vc........................................................................................................... 4-50
ii
Table of Contents
4.57 debug x25 xot........................................................................................................ 4-51 Chapter 5 Frame Relay Commands............................................................................................ 5-1 5.1 clear frame-relay-inarp .............................................................................................. 5-1 5.2 encapsulation frame-relay......................................................................................... 5-2 5.3 frame-relay interface-dlci........................................................................................... 5-2 5.4 frame-relay intf-type .................................................................................................. 5-3 5.5 frame-relay inverse-arp ............................................................................................. 5-4 5.6 frame-relay ip tcp header-compress ......................................................................... 5-5 5.7 frame-relay lmi-n391dte ............................................................................................ 5-6 5.8 frame-relay lmi-n392dce ........................................................................................... 5-6 5.9 frame-relay lmi-n392dte ............................................................................................ 5-7 5.10 frame-relay lmi-n393dce ......................................................................................... 5-8 5.11 frame-relay lmi-n393dte .......................................................................................... 5-9 5.12 frame-relay lmi-t391dte ......................................................................................... 5-10 5.13 frame-relay lmi-t392dce ........................................................................................ 5-11 5.14 frame-relay lmi-type .............................................................................................. 5-12 5.15 frame-relay local-dlci ............................................................................................. 5-12 5.16 frame-relay map .................................................................................................... 5-13 5.17 frame-relay route ................................................................................................... 5-14 5.18 frame-relay switching ............................................................................................ 5-15 5.19 show frame-relay lmi ............................................................................................. 5-16 5.20 show frame-relay map........................................................................................... 5-16 5.21 show frame-relay packet ....................................................................................... 5-17 5.22 show frame-relay pvc ............................................................................................ 5-17 5.23 show frame-relay route ......................................................................................... 5-18 5.24 show frame-relay status ........................................................................................ 5-19 5.25 show frame-relay traffic......................................................................................... 5-20 5.26 debug frame-relay ................................................................................................. 5-20 Chapter 6 HDLC Commands ....................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 encapsulation hdlc .................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 keepalive ................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.3 debug hdlc................................................................................................................. 6-2
iii
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Chapter 1 PPP and MP Commands

PPP and MP configuration commands include: encapsulation ppp multilink multilink-user ppp authentication ppp callback ppp chap host ppp chap password ppp compression stac ppp multilink ppp negotiation timeout ppp pap sent-username
1.1 encapsulation ppp

To configure the link-layer protocol encapsulation on the interface as PPP, use the command encapsulation ppp. encapsulation ppp
Default
Default protocol encapsulation is PPP.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
PPP is a link-layer protocol supporting network-layer packets over the point-to-point link. It defines a whole set of protocols including LCP (link control protocol), NCP (network-layer control protocol), PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). It is widely in use for it provides user authentication, easy scalability and supports synchronization and asynchronization. The link-layer encapsulation protocol on the local interface should be the same as that on the remote interface.
Example
! The following example configures PPP encapsulation on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation ppp
Related Command
show interface
1-1
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
1.2 multilink
To configure MP parameter, use the command multilink. multilink { max-bind binds | max-frags frags }
Syntax Description
binds Maximum number of link binds allowed by a MP. Frags Maximum number of fragments allowed by a MP.
Default
Default number is 4 for both the binds and frags.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The multilink max-bind binds command can be used to set the maximum number of link binds allowed by an MP. MP allows a data packet to be broken down into fragments so that they can be sent over different links to improve efficiency. The multilink max-frags frags command can be used to set the maximum number of fragments allowed. These two parameters will affect the size of the receiving buffer, so one should make choice according to the actual situation.
Example
! The following example sets the maximum number of link binds for an MP to 10. Quidway(config)# multilink max-bind 10 ! The following example sets the maximum number of frags for an MP to 10. Quidway(config)# multilink max-frags 10
Related Command
ppp multilink, multilink-user
1.3 multilink-user
To configure MP binds based on the username, use the command multilink-user. multilink-user user-name bind virtual-template number
Syntax Description
user-name username. number interface serial number.
1-2
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The specified interface should be encapsulated with PPP, and its MP attributes should be specified. After PPP authentication succeeds, it can be decided whether to bind the MP based on the remote username and which interfaces operating parameter is to be adopted for binding. If a virtual interface template is specified, a new virtual interface will be adopted.
Example
! The following example specifies the corresponding virtual interface template 1 for the username Quidway, and configures the IP address of the virtual interface template as 202.38. 60.1. Quidway(config)# multilink-user Quidway bind virtual-template 1 Quidway(config)# interface virtual-template 1 Quidway(config-virtual-template1)# ip address 202.38.60.1 255.255.255.0
Related Command
ppp multilink
1.4 ppp authentication

To set the PPP authentication method for the remote router, use the command ppp authentication. To disable the configuration, use the no form of the command. ppp authentication { chap | pap | chap pap | pap chap } [ callin ] [ default | namelist ] no ppp authentication
Syntax Description
chap using CHAP authentication pap using PAP authentication chap pap first performs CHAP authentication, then perform PAP authentication pap chap first performs PAP authentication, then perform CHAP authentication callin means that only when the remote user calls in can he be authenticated. default and name-list AAA authentication methods lists. For detailed description, refer to the corresponding section of AAA settings.
Default
No PPP authentication is specified.
1-3
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
There are two PPP authentication methods: PAP and CHAP. PAP is a twice handshake authentication, which transfers the password in plain text. CHAP is a three-time handshake, which does not transfer the password in the network. Comparatively, CHAP authentication has the better secrecy, and is more secure and reliable. At an asynchronous dialer interface, you can perform authentication only on incoming calls instead of outgoing calls. This configuration is necessary when the router serves as an access server. In addition, the defined AAA authentication method is used. CHAP or PAP is just an authentication process. The success of the authentication is decided by AAA, which can authenticate based on the local authentication database or AAA server.
Example
! The following example authenticates the remote router by means of PAP method on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp authentication pap
Related Command
user, ppp chap host, ppp pap sent-username, aaa authentication ppp
1.5 ppp callback

To enable PPP to send or accept the callback request, use the command ppp callback. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. ppp callback { request | accept } no ppp callback { request | accept }
Syntax Description
request sending a callback request. accept accepting a callback request.
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
1-4
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Usage Guideline
The callback function can save transmission costs for the caller. Callback function is necessary in some special circumstances.
Example
! The following example enables interface Serial0 to accept PPP callback request. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp callback accept
Related Command
encapsulation ppp
1.6 ppp chap host

To the local router name with the CHAP, use the command ppp chap host. To disable the configuration, use the no form of the command. ppp chap host hostname no ppp chap host
Syntax Description
hostname name of the local router
Default
Quidway or domain name of a router configured via the hostname command.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
While configuring CHAP authentication, you need to configure the hostname as the remote user, and the corresponding password must be the same. The no form of the command can delete the configured hostname (name of the local router).
Example
! The following example configures the local router named as Quidway when CHAP authentication is performed on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp chap host Quidway
Related Command
ppp authentication, user
1-5
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
1.7 ppp chap password

To configure the default CHAP password when the local router authenticates the remote router, use the command ppp chap password. To disable the configuration, use the no form of the command. ppp chap password { 0 | 7 } password no ppp chap password
Syntax Description
password Password transmitted. 0 Display the password simple text. 7 Display the password in encrypted text.
Default
CHAP password is null.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
While configuring CHAP authentication, if you cannot find out the username that is sent from the far end in the user table, authenticate the remote user with the password configured via this command.
Example
! The following example sets the user password as Quidway in simple text when the local routers perform the authentication via CHAP. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp chap password 0 Quidway
Related Command
ppp authentication chap, user
1.8 ppp compression stac

To enable the Stac compression algorithm on the PPP of the interface, use the command ppp compression stac. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. ppp compression stac no ppp compression stac
Default
Disabled.
1-6
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Command Mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage Guideline
When Stac compression is configured on the interface, the data frame size can be reduced through data compression without incurring damage to the data. But in this way, it use will add to the load of your router. So you had better disable this function. In addition, only when Stac is configured at both ends of a point-to-point link will this PPP link support Stac compression.
Example
! The following example configures Stac compression on the local router. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp compression stac
1.9 ppp multilink

To enable Multilink PPP (MP) on interface, use the command ppp multilink. To disable the MP attribute, use the no form of the command. ppp multilink no ppp multilink
Default
SP (Single PPP) mode.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
To increase bandwidth, multiple PPP links can be bound to form a logical MP interface. For this purpose, it is necessary to specify a virtual interface template on the corresponding physical interface. MP can be configured on any physical interface encapsulated with PPP, and it can also be configured on the virtual interface template and Dialer interfaces. Note that, to use MP on the virtual interface template and Dialer interface, The physical interface can only use MP only after the MP on this template and interface is enabled first.
Example
! The following example configures PPP encapsulation on interface Serial0 operates in MP mode. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp multilink
1-7
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Related Command
encapsulation ppp, multilink-user, interface virtual-template
1.10 ppp negotiation timeout

To set the PPP negotiation timeout, use the command ppp negotiation timeout. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. ppp negotiation timeout seconds ppp negotiate timeout
Syntax Description
seconds negotiation timeout in second. During PPP negotiation, if no acknowledgement is received from the remote end within this time range, PPP will retransmit the packets that have been previously transmitted.
Default
3 seconds.
Command Mode
Example
! The following example sets the PPP negotiation timeout to 10 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp negotiate timeout 10
Related Command
encapsulation ppp
1.11 ppp pap sent-username

To configure the username and password when the local router is authenticated by the remote router via the PAP method, use the command ppp pap sent-username. To disable the configuration, use the no form of the command. ppp pap sent-username sent-username password { 0 | 7 } password no ppp pap sent-username
Syntax Description
sent-username username sent. password password sent. 0 password in simple text. 7 password in encrypted text.
1-8
Chapter 1
PPP and MP Commands
Default
When the local router is authenticated by the remote end via PAP method, both the username and password sent are quidway by default.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the local router is authenticated via the PAP method by the remote router, the sent-username and password sent by the local router must be the same as the user and password of the remote router.
Example
! The following example sets the username of the local router authenticated by the remote end via the PAP method as Huawei and the password as Quidway. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp pap sent-username Huawei password 0 Quidway
Related Command
ppp authentication pap, user
1-9
Chapter 2
SLIP Commands
Chapter 2 SLIP Commands

SLIP configuration commands include: encapsulation slip
2.1 encapsulation slip

To set the SLIP protocol encapsulation on the interface encapsulation slip
Default
Protocol encapsulation on the interface is PPP encapsulation.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
SLIP (Serial Line IP), a simpler link-layer protocol, can be used over a point-to-point link. It is mainly used to run TCP/IP over the point-to-point serial interface connection. SLIP can only be used over the asynchronous link. SLIP simply defines the start and end signs for a frame so as to intercept the IP packet on the serial line. As compared with PPP, it involves no address concept, no negotiation process, no packet type discrimination (so only one network protocol can be supported at one time), and no error correction function. While SLIP is used, SLIP encapsulation must be configured on the interfaces at both ends of a link.
Example
! The following example configures SLIP encapsulation on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-serial0)# encapsulation slip
2-1
Chapter 3
ISDN Commands
Chapter 3 ISDN Commands

ISDN configuration commands include: isdn answer1 isdn answer2 show isdn active show isdn answer show isdn status show isdn timer
3.1 isdn answer1

To have the router verify a called-party number or sub-address number in the incoming setup packet, use the command isdn answer1. To remove the verification request, use the no form of the command. isdn answer1 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ] no isdn answer1 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]
Syntax Description
called-party-number called number, 20 or fewer characters long. subaddress sub-address, 20 or fewer digits/letters long, case insensitive.
Default
The router does not verify the called number or sub-address number.
Command Mode
ISDN BRI and PRI Interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to set checking items in the incoming setup packet. When the sub-address is set, this call will be rejected be the remote user no sending a subaddress or sending a wrong sub-address. In addition, the isdn answer2 command can be used to set an additional check item.
Example
! The following example sets the check number for BRI0 incoming setup packet to 66668888. Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# isdn answer1 66668888 ! The following example removes the above setting. Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# no isdn answer1
3-1
Chapter 3
ISDN Commands
Related Command
isdn answer2, show isdn answer
3.2 isdn answer2

To have the router verify an additional called-party number or sub-address number in the coming setup packet, use the command isdn answer2. To remove the verification request, use the no form of the command. isdn answer2 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ] no isdn answer2 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]
Syntax Description
called-party-number called number, 20 or fewer characters long. Subaddress sub-address, 20 or fewer digits/letters long, case insensitive.
Default
The router does not verify the called number or sub-address number.
Command Mode
ISDN BRI and PRI Interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to set checking items in incoming setup packet. When the subaddress is set, this call will be rejected be the remote user not sending a sub-address or sending a wrong sub-address. The additional check item and check item are two independent settings. Meeting either of them, an incoming setup packet can pass the check.
Example
! The following example sets the sub-address requiring additional verification on interface Bri0 to sub2000. Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# isdn answer2: sub2000 ! The following example removes the above setting. Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# no isdn answer2
Related Command
isdn answer1, show isdn answer
3.3 show isdn active

To display the current call information on the ISDN interface, use the command show isdn active.
3-2
Chapter 3
ISDN Commands
show isdn active [ interface interface-name ]
Syntax Description
interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the current call information will be displayed.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The user can use the information shown via this command to diagnose the ISDN call problems.
Example
The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show isdn active interface bri 0
Bri0 : Channel Call Info Property B1 Digital B2 Analog Call Type Out In Calling Calling Called Called Number Subaddress Number Subaddress 8810124 8810118 380 8810150 2201
The above information indicates that there are two active calls on the ISDN Bri0 interface: Digital call to 8810124 by B1 channel. Analog call from a terminal whose number is 8810118 and sub-address is 380 by B2 channel.
3.4 show isdn answer

To display the incoming called-party number and sub-address to be checked on the ISDN interface, use the command show isdn answer. show isdn answer [ interface interface-name ]
Syntax Description
interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the incoming called-party number and sub-address will be checked on ISDN interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After incoming call verification is over, the user can confirm if the configuration is correct according to the information output via this command.
3-3
Chapter 3
ISDN Commands
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show isdn answer interface bri 0
Bri0 : ISDN Answer1 ISDN Answer2 66668888 :sub2000
The above information indicates that the called-party number to be checked on Bri0 in incoming setup packet is 66668888, the sub-address requiring additional check is sub2000.
Related Command
isdn answer1, isdn answer2
3.5 show isdn status

To display the current status of the ISDN interface, use the command show isdn status. show isdn status [ interface interface-name ]
Syntax Description
interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the current status on the ISDN interface will be displayed.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The information output via this command includes the states of the layers of the ISDN protocol on the interface, including Q.921 and Q.931. Using this command, users can make fault diagnosis.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show isdn status interface bri 0
Bri0: Layer 2 Status: TEI = 64 , State = MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED Layer 3 Status: 2 Active Layer 3 Call(s) CCIndex = 0x0001 , State = Setup , CES = 1 , Channel =0x00000002 , Calling_Num = 661003 , Calling_Sub = , Called_Num = 660066 , Called_Sub = CCIndex = 0x0000 , State = Active , CES = 1 , Channel = 0x00000001 , Calling_Num = 661004 , Calling_Sub = , Called_Num = 660066 , Called_Sub =
The above information indicates the following: layer-2 link TEI on ISDN Bri0 is 64, and its status is multiple-frame-setup
3-4
Chapter 3
ISDN Commands
The count of active calls on layer 3 is 2. For the call with index number 0x000, its state is Setup, CES is 1, channel is 0x00000002, the calling and called numbers are 661003 and 660066 respectively, and calling and called sub-addresses are both vacant. For the call with index number 0x0000, its status is Active, CES is 1, the channel is 0x00000001, the calling and called numbers are 661004 and 660066 respectively, the calling and called sub-addresses are both vacant.
Related Command
show interface
3.6 show isdn timer

To display the value of the ISDN timer, use the command show isdn timer. show isdn timer
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is mainly intended for technical support engineers in their fault diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Example
! The following is sample output of the command. Quidway# show isdn timer
ISDN Layer 2 K N200 T200 T202 T203 ISDN Layer 3 T301 T302 T303 T304 T305 T308 T309 T310 T313 T314 T316 T317 T318 T319 T321 T322 values = 1 = 3 = 1 = 2 = 10 Values = 240 = 15 = 4 = 15 = 30 = 4 = 90 = 10 = 4 = 4 = 120 = 10 = 4 = 4 = 30 = 4 Outstanding I-frames on BRI port Max number of retransmits Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds
Related Command
show interface
3-5
Chapter 4
LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands
Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands

LAPB, X.25, and X.25 switch configuration commands include: clear xot encapsulation lapb encapsulation x25 lapb k lapb modulo lapb n1 lapb n2 lapb t1 lapb t2 lapb t3 x25 accept-reverse x25 address x25 alias x25 check-response-address x25 default x25 facility x25 hic x25 hoc x25 hold-queue x25 hold-vc-timer x25 htc x25 idle x25 ips x25 lic x25 linkrestart x25 loc x25 ltc x25 map x25 modulo x25 nvc x25 ops x25 pvc x25 pvc x25 pvc XOT x25 response-called-address x25 response-calling-address x25 roa x25 route x25 route XOT x25 routing x25 supress-called-address x25 supress-calling-address x25 threshold x25 tx0 x25 tx1 x25 tx2 x25 tx3 x25 use-source-address
4-1
Chapter 4
x25 win x25 wout show x25 alias show x25 interface show x25 map show x25 switch-vc-table show x25 route show x25 vc debug x25 xot
4.1 clear xot

To clear a XOT link initiatively, use the command clear xot remote ip-address1 port1 local ip-address2 port2 clear xot remote ip-address1 port1 local ip-address2 port2
Syntax Description
remote indicates that the following parameters are those of the remote host. ip-address1 the remote ip-address connected via XOT port1 the remote port number connected via XOT local indicates that the following parameters are those of the local host. ip-address2 the local ip-address connected via XOT port2 the local port number connected via XOT
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Using the command clear xot can initiatively clear the XOT link.
Example
! Clear a XOT link. Quidway# clear xot remote 10.1.1.2 1024 local 10.1.1.1 1998
Related Command
show x25 vc x25 routing
4.2 encapsulation lapb

To specify a serial interface using LAPB encapsulation, use the command encapsulation lapb. encapsulation lapb [ dte | dce ] [ ip ]
4-2
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
dte specifies operation as a data terminal equipment device. dce specifies operation as a data communications equipment device. ip specifies the IP as the network-layer protocol supported by LAPB.
Default
DTE operation is the default LAPB mode. IP is the default protocol.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Though a layer-2 protocol of X.25, LAPB can act as an independent link-layer protocol for serial interface encapsulation and simple data transmission. Generally, LAPB encapsulation can be used when two routers are connected directly with a dedicated line. Now one end works in DTE mode, and the other in DCE mode.
Example
! The following example sets the operating mode as DCE and specifies LAPB encapsulation on Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation lapb dce
Related Command
show interface
4.3 encapsulation x25

To specify a serial interfaces operation as an X.25 device, use the command encapsulation x25. Later on, all the incoming or outgoing datagram will be transmitted in X.25 encapsulation mode. The interface that has executed this command is called the X.25 interface. encapsulation x25 [ dte | dce ] [ ietf | ddn | bfe | cisco-compatible ]
Syntax Description
dte specifies operation as a DTE. This is the default mode. dce specifies operation as a DCE. ietf specifies that the interfaces datagram encapsulation defaults to use of the IETF standard method, as defined by RFC-1356. ddn specifies DDN encapsulation on an interface using DDN X.25 standard service. bfe specifies BFE encapsulation on an interface attached to a BFE device. cisco-compatible specifies that the interface datagram encapsulation is compatible with that of Cisco.
4-3
Chapter 4
Default
The default interface encapsulation is PPP. For X.25 encapsulation, the default operation is DTE IETF.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
One end of an X.25 link must be a logical DCE and the other end a logical DTE (This assignment is independent of the interfaces hardware DTE or DCE identity). Typically, when connecting to an X.25 public data network (PDN), the customer equipment acts as the DTE and the PDN attachment acts as the DCE. However, if two routers are connected simply back to back, both routers actually act as user equipment (routers). The both ends of this connection should be a logical DTE and a DCE respectively (that is, in a setting where the two routers are connected back-to-back, one works in DTE mode and the other in DCE mode). Once a X.25 interface is re-encapsulated, be it with other link-layer protocol or X.25 protocol, all the X.25 parameters that you have configured except the address mapping are restored to their default values. That is to say, when X.25 encapsulation is used again on this interface, you can only use address mapping among the configurations that have been previously used. In a normal application without any special requirement, please select datagram encapsulation in the IETF format.
Example
! The following example specifies the use of X.25 encapsulation on the specified Serial0, which works in DTE IETF mode. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 dte ietf
Related Command
show interface
4.4 lapb k
To configure the LAPB window parameter K, use the command lapb k. To restore the default value of LAPB window parameter K, use the no form of the command. lapb k k-value no lapb k
Syntax Description
k-value maximum permissible number of I frames to be determined by the DTE or DCE in the specified time. If the modulo size is 8, then the window parameter K ranges 1 through 7; if the modulo size is 128, the window parameter K ranges 1 through 127.
4-4
Chapter 4
Default
Default window parameter K is 7.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The value of the window parameter K needs to be determined by the modulo size. no lapb k is used to restore the default value.
Example
! The following example sets the LAPB window parameter K as 7 on Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb k 7
Related Command
lapb modulo
4.5 lapb modulo

To specify the LAPB frame protocol mode (also called modulo size), use the command lapb modulo. Use the no form of the command to restore to the default value. lapb modulo { 128 | 8 } no lapb modulo
Syntax Description
128 modulo128 protocol mode is used. 8 modulo128 protocol mode is used..
Default
Default LAPB frame protocol mode is modulo 8.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
There are two LAPB frame protocol methods: modulo 8 and modulo 128. Each data frame (I frame) is numbered in sequence, ranging 0 to one less than the window modulus. And serial numbers will cycle within the range of modulo size. Modulo 8 is a basic method, implemented by all the standard LAPB standards. It is sufficient for most links. Modulo 128 can achieve greater throughput on a high-speed link that has a lower error rate. The maximum value of the LAPB window parameter K is constrained by modulo size, that is, the maximum value is one less than the window
4-5
Chapter 4
modulus; and K specifies the maximum frames that can be sent before receipt of the acknowledgement.
Example
! The following example set the LAPB frame protocol mode on Serial0 to modulo 8 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb modulo 8
Related Command
lapb k
4.6 lapb n1
To configure the LAPB N1parameter, use the command lapb n1. To restore to the default N1 value, use the no form of the command. lapb n1 n1-value no lapb n1
Syntax Description
n1-value the N1 parameter, ranging 1080 bits to 12056 bits.
Default
Default is 12032 bits.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The N1 value is the maximum number of bits of I frame that the DCE or DTE expects to receive from the DTE or DCE. This value should be 8 times the MTU plus the packet size of the protocol header. This value defines the maximum size of the transmission frame, thus deciding the maximum size of the encapsulated X.25 packet.
Example
! The following example sets the LAPB N1parameter on Serial0 to 1080. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb n1 1080
4.7 lapb n2
To specify LAPB N2 parameter, use the command of lapb n2. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. lapb n2 n2-value no lapb n2
4-6
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
n2-value the value of the N2 parameter, ranging 1 to 255.
Default
Default value of LAPB N2 parameter is 5.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The N2 value is the maximum numbers of tries for successful frame transmissions from a DCE/DTE to a DTE/DCE.
Example
! The following example sets the LAPB N2 parameter on Serial0 to 20. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb n2 20
4.8 lapb t1
To se the LAPB transmission timer T1, use the command lapb t1. To restore to the default value of T1, use the no form of the command. lapb t1 t1-value no lapb t1
Syntax Description
t1-value the value of T1, ranging 1ms to 64000 ms.
Default
Default value of T1 for the LAPB system is 2000ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
T1 is a transmission timer. When T1 expires, DTE (DCE) will start retransmission. The value of T1 should be greater than the maximum time spanning between sending a frame and receiving an acknowledgement. no lapb t1 is used to restore the default value of this parameter.
Example
! The following example sets the T1 transmission timer on Serial0 to 1000ms. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb t1 1000
4-7
Chapter 4
Related Command
lapb t2, lapb t3
4.9 lapb t2
To configure LAPB system transmission timer T2, use the command lapb t2. To restore to the default value of T2, use the no form of the command. lapb t2 t2-value no lapb t2
Syntax Description
t2-value the value of the timer T2, ranging 1ms to 64000 ms.
Default
Default value of the LAPB system timer is 1000ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
T2 is a reception timer. When it times out, the DTE/DCE must send an acknowledgement frame so that this frame can be received before the remote DTE/DCE T1 timer expires (T2<T1). no lapb t2 is used to restore the default value of this parameter.
Example
! The following example sets the LAPB timer T2 on Serial0 to 2000ms. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb t2 2000
Related Command
lapb t1
4.10 lapb t3
To set the LAPB system timer T3, use the command of lapb t3. To restore to the default value of T3, use the no form of the command. lapb t3 t3-value no lapb t3
Syntax Description
t3-value value of the timer T3, ranging 0ms to 64000ms.
4-8
Chapter 4
Default
Default value of the LAPB timer T3 is 0ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
T3 is an idle timer. When it expires, the DCE reports to the packet layer that the channel stays idle for a long time. It should be greater than the timer T1 (T3>T1) on a DCE. When T3 is 0, this indicates that it does not function yet. no lapb t3 is used to restore the default value of this parameter.
Example
! The following example sets the LAPB timer T3 on Serial0 to 10000ms. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb t3 10000
Related Command
lapb t1
4.11 x25 accept-reverse

To configure an X.25 interface to accept all reverse charge calls, use the command x25 accept-reverse. To disable the facility, use the no form of the command. x25 accept-reverse no x25 accept-reverse
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This function does not affect any call without the reverse charge call function On an X.25 interface, you can enable the function of reverse charge call. Then, any such calls to the X.25 interface will be accepted. If the option of accept-reverse in the x25 map command enables the function for a mapping, only the calls with related mapping to this interface could be accepted while the other calls (i.e., the calls carrying the request of reverse charge, but with no related mapping) will be cleared. Use show x25 interface serial command, you can check if the function on an X.25 interface is enabled.
4-9
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example sets acceptance of reverse charge calls function on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 accept-reverse
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, x25 map
4.12 x25 address

To set the X.121 address of an X.25 interface, use the command x25 address. To delete the address, use the no form of the command. x25 address x.121-address no x25 address
Syntax Description
x.121-address X.121 address of an interface.
Default
If the data encapsulation format on this X.25 interface is IETF, this interface has no address. If the data encapsulation format on this X.25 interface is BFE or DDN, then the X121 address of this interface is derived through dynamic conversion of IP address on this interface. And it is not allowed to modify this X.121 address.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If a router is connected to an X.25 public data network, then the ISP shall assign a legal X.121 address for it. In a setting where two routers are connected back to back, this legal X.121 address can be specified at your discretion. If you want the router to work in a switched mode, you do not have to configure the X.121 address. When you reconfigure an X.121 address for an X.25 interface, you do not have to delete the original X.121 address, for the new address will overwrite the old one. After re-encapsulating an X.25 interface, the original X.121 address will be deleted. Only after the re-encapsulation shall the new X.121 address take effect. Note: For the format of the X.121 address and the dynamic conversion of IP address and X.121 address, please consult ITU-T Recommendation X.121 and relevant RFC documents.
Example
! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0 and sets the X.121 address as 20112451. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0
4-10
Chapter 4
Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 address 20112451
Related Command
show interface, show x25 interface
4.13 x25 alias

To specify an alias for X.25 interface that will allow the interface to match all types of mode, use the command x25 alias. To delete the alias, use the no form of the command. x25 alias match-type alias-string no x25 alias match-type alias-string
Syntax Description
match-type match type of the alias. The optional match types include: free: free match free-ext: extended free match left: left alignment match left-ext: extended left alignment match right: right alignment match right-ext: extended right alignment match strict: strict match whole: whole match whole-ext: extended whole match alias-string string of the alias
Default
No x.25 alias is configured.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When an X.25 call is forwarded between networks, different X.25 networks may perform some operations on the destination addresses (that is, the called DTE address) carried by this call packet, for example, routinely adding or deleting the prefix and suffix. In this case, you need to set an interface alias for the router to adapt to this change. Please consult your ISP to learn if the network supports this function before deciding if the alias function is enabled or not. For the detail about the X.25 alias matching method, please consult the chapter LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration in the manual of Configuration Guide.
4-11
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0, configures the X.121 address as 20112451, and set two aliases in different match types for it. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 address 20112451 Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 alias 20112451$ Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 alias $20112451 With the above configurations, a call whose destination address is 20112451 can be accepted as long as it can reach the local X.25 interface Serial0, no matter whether the network is performing the prefix adding operation or suffix adding operation.
Related Command
show x25 alias, show x25 interface serial, x25 address
4.14 x25 check-response-address

To configure and check the field of the address code group in the X.25 call accept/connection packet, use the command x25 check-response-address. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. x25 check-response-address no x25 check-response-address
Default
no x25 check-response-address is checked.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Some networks require that, when the called DTE returns the call accept packet to the calling DTE, it cannot carry the field of the called DTE address. Some require that it cannot carry the field of the calling DTE address. Some require that it can carry neither while some require that it can carry both. To meet various requirements, the X. 25 of the Quidway series of routers offers this function. You can consult the ISP about these requirements before deciding if this function is to be enabled or not.
Example
! The following example enables this function for the X.25 interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 check-response-address
4-12
Chapter 4
Related Command
show x25 interface, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-calling-address
4.15 x25 default

To set a default protocol for X.25 interface, use the command x25 default. To remove the protocol specified, use the no form of the command. x25 default protocol-type no x25 default
Syntax Description
protocol-type protocol type.
Default
IP is carried over X.25 by default.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For received calls not carrying caller user data (CUD) or carrying a CUD that cannot be resolved, the X.25 of the Quidway series of routers need to decide the upper-layer protocol over this call through this parameter. If this parameter is not configured, all such incoming calls will be cleared.
Example
! The following example sets the default upper-layer protocol over the X.25 interface Serial0 to IP. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 default ip
Related Command
x25 map
4.16 x25 facility

To set user options for an X.25 interface, use the command x25 facility. After an option is set, all outgoing X.25 calls from the X.25 interface will carry a relevant information field. To disable the facility, use the no form of the command. x25 facility facility-type facility-value no x25 facility facility-type facility-value
4-13
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
facility-type user facility type. facility-value facility value.
Default
No facility is set.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The following table shows the user facilities supported by X.25 of the Quidway series of routers and the parameters required. Table LLC-4-1 X.25 facility type and parameters
Facility type and parameter value cug number packetsize in-size out-size windowsize in-size out-size Meaning Specifies a closed user group (CUG) number for the X.25 interface. CUG can be used by a PDN to create a VPN within the larger network and to restrict access. CUGs 1 to 9999 are allowed. Specifies input maximum packet size (in-size) and output maximum packet size (out-size) for flow control parameter negotiation. Both values must be one of the following value: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. Specifies the packet count for input windows (in-size) and the output windows (out-size) when the call is originated by X.25 interface. Two parameters, i.e., the in-size and out-size, must be in the range of 1 to one less than the window modulus (including 1 and one less than the modulus). Specifies reverse charging on all calls originated by this X.25 interface. Set the requested throughput class negotiation values when a call is originated by X.25 interface. The values of in/out are defined to be 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000. Specifies the maximum network transit delay to request for the duration of outgoing calls for a network when a call is originated by the X.25 interface. You can set this request to any value ranging 0 second to 65534 second (including 0 and 65534). Specifies the name defined by the x25 roa command in Global configuration mode for the X.25 interface.
reverse throughput in out transit-delay value
roa name
The user facilities set via this command are effective for all the calls originated by this X.25 interface. You can set a user option for a X.25 call from a certain address mapping through the command of x25 map protocol-name protocol-address x.121-address facility-type facility-value.
Example
! The following example specifies the traffic flow parameters negotiation with the remote end for all the calls from the X.25 interface serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility packetsize 512 512 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility windowsize 5 5
4-14
Chapter 4
Related Command
show x25 interface, x25 map
4.17 x25 hic

To set the highest incoming-only X.25 virtual circuit number, use the command x25 hic. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 hic circuit-number no x25 hic
Syntax Description
circuit-number virtual circuit number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you must set another parameter lic (the lowest incoming-only virtual circuit number) of X.25 to 0, indicating that the incoming-only virtual circuit is disabled.
Default
Default highest incoming-only X.25 virtual circuit number is 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By default, the Quidway series of routers disable the use of the incoming-only and outgoing-only virtual circuit. Only the two-way range (1-1024) is kept for use. Please set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP. For VC setting requirements, please consult the chapter of LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration.
Example
! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables incomingonly and two-way virtual circuit and disables the outgoing-only virtual circuit. After this serial command is executed, the three ranges are respectively: [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0, 0]. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 lic 1 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hic 7 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 8
Related Command
x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 loc, x25 ltc
4-15
Chapter 4
4.18 x25 hoc

To set the highest outgoing-only X.25 virtual circuit number, use the command x25 hoc. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 hoc circuit-number no x25 hoc
Syntax Description
circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you must set loc (the lowest outgoing-only virtual circuit number) to 0, indicating that the outgoing-only virtual circuit is disabled.
Default
Default highest out-going virtual circuit number is 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Example
! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on Serial0,3 enables outgoingonly and two-way virtual circuit and disables the incoming-only virtual circuit. After this serial command is executed, the three ranges are respectively: [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0, 0]. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 8 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 10 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 15 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 20
Related Command
x25 hic, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25, x25 ltc
4-16
Chapter 4
4.19 x25 hold-queue

To set the length of the hold queue of the X.25 Virtual circuit, use the command x25 hold-queue. To restore the length of the queue to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 hold-queue queue-length no x25 hold-queue
Syntax Description
queue-length length of the queue (with the number of packets as the unit).
Default
Default length of the hold queue in the X.25 VC is 50.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the data traffic is too heavy, you can use this command to extend the receive queue and send queue of the X.25 VC to avoid data loss which may affect transmission performance. It should be noted here that modifying this parameter would not affect the hold queue limits of the existing VC.
Example
! The following example sets the X.25 hold queue to hold 75 datagrams. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hold-queue 75
Related Command
x25 ips, x25 ops
4.20 x25 hold-vc-timer

To start the timer that prevents additional calls to a destination, use the command x25 hold-vc-timer. To restore the default value for the timer, use the no form of the command. x25 hold-vc-timer minutes no x25 hold-vc-timer
Syntax Description
minutes Number of minutes to prevent calls from going to previously failed destination.
4-17
Chapter 4
Default
Default value is 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Sending call requests to a wrong destination (which does not exist or is faulty) will deteriorate the working efficiency of the Quidway router. The use of this function can avoid this problem to some degree. If this parameter is set to 0, this is equal to disabling the function. In addition, this function is effective to the locally originated calls only. That is, this parameter is meaningless when the X.25 of the Quidway router works in switched mode.
Example
! The following example sets the timer on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 5 minutes. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hold-vc-timer 5
Related Command
show x25 interface serial
4.21 x25 htc

To set the highest two-way VC number, use the command x25 htc. To restore the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 htc circuit-number no x25 htc
Syntax Description
circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you must set another X.25 parameter 1tc (lowest two-way VC number) to 0, indicating that the twoway VC is disabled. For VC setting requirements, please consult LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration.
Default
Default highest two-way X.25 VC number is 1024.
Command Mode
4-18
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
Example
! The following command series configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0, disables the incoming-only virtual circuit, and enables the two-way and the outgoingonly virtual circuit. When this command series is executed, the three ranges are [0, 0], [8, 10] and [11, 20], respectively. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 8 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 10 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 11 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 20
Related Command
x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 lic, x25 loc, x25 ltc
4.22 x25 idle

To define the maximum period of SVC idle time for a certain interface, use the command x25 idle To restore the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 idle minutes no x25 idle
Syntax Description
minutes maximum SVC idle period in minute.
Default
0 minute.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This parameter does not affect a PVC and a SVC. When a SVC stays idle for a period of time (without data transmission), X.25 in the Quidway series of routers will clear this
4-19
Chapter 4
SVC automatically. If this parameter is set to 0, this SVC will be reserved no matter how long it stays idle. The setting of this parameter will affect all the SVCs on this X.25 interface. Also you can set the maximum idle time for a SVC attached to this address map through the option in the command of x25 map.
Example
! The following example sets the maximum idle time for the SVC on interface Serial0 to 10 minutes. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 idle 10
Related Command
clear x25 vc, x25 map
4.23 x25 ips

To set the maximum input packet size for an X.25 interface, use the command x25 ips. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 ips bytes no x25 ips
Syntax Description
bytes maximum packet size in byte. It can be one of the following value: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
Default
Default maximum packet size is 128.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Usually, the X.25 public data network has a maximum transmission packet size, and the size of a packet sent by the DTE shall not exceed this length (otherwise it will trigger the resetting of the VC). So, the DTEs at both the send and receive ends are required to have the fragmentation and reassembling functions. The DTE at the send end break the packet into more packets with the more data bit (M-bit) set except for the last. When the DTE at the receive end receives this series of fragments, it reassembles these fragments into a packet according to the M bit, and sends it to the upper-layer protocol. Please consult your ISP about this maximum receive packet size. Normally, the maximum receive packet size is equivalent to the maximum send packet. Unless your ISP allows, please do not set these two parameters to different values.
4-20
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example sets the maximum incoming packet size and maximum outgoing packet size on X.25 interface Serial0 to 256 bytes. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ips 256 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ops 256
Related Command
x25 facility, x25 ops, x25 pvc
4.24 x25 lic

To set the lowest incoming virtual circuit number, use the command x25 lic. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 lic circuit-number no x25 lic
Syntax Description
circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is set to 0, you must set another X.25 parameter hic (the highest number of incoming-only virtual circuit) to 0, indicating that the incoming-only virtual circuit is disabled.
Default
Default lowest incoming-only virtual circuit number is 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By default, the Quidway series of routers disable the use of the incoming-only and outgoing-only virtual circuit. Only the two-way range (1-1024) is kept for use. Please set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP. For VC range setting requirements, please consult LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration.
Example
! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables the incoming-only and the two-way virtual circuits and disables the outgoing-only virtual circuit. When this serial commands are executed, the three ranges are [1, 9], [11, 1024] and [0, 0], respectively. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 lic 1
4-21
Chapter 4
Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hic 9 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 11 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 1024
Related Command
x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25, x25 ltc
4.25 x25 linkrestart

To force X.25 levels 3 (packet level) to restart when layer 2 (LAPB, link level) resets, use the command x25 linkrestart. To shut down the function, use the no form of the command. x25 linkrestart no x25 linkrestart
Default
Enabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Generally, this function is necessary. The function should not be shut down unless special requirements are made for a network environment.
Example
! The following example shut down the function on the X.25 interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# no x25 linkrestart
Related Command
clear x25 vc
4.26 x25 loc

To set the lowest outgoing-only VC number, use the command x25 loc. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 loc circuit-number no x25 loc
4-22
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If the parameter is set to 0, you must set another X.25 parameter hoc (highest outgoing-only virtual circuit number) to 0, indicating that the outgoing-only virtual circuit is disabled.
Default
Default lowest outgoing-only virtual circuit number is 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By default, the Quidway series of routers disable the use of the incoming-only and outgoing-only virtual circuit. Only the two-way range (1-1024) is kept for use. Please set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP. For VC range setting requirements, please consult LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration.
Example
! The following serial command configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, disables incoming-only virtual circuit, enables the two-way and the outgoing-only virtual circuits. When this serial command is executed, the three ranges are [0, 0], [1990, 1995] and [2000, 2005], respectively. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 1990 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 1995 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 2000 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hoc 2005
Related Command
x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 ltc
4.27 x25 ltc

To set the lowest two-way VC number, use the command x25 ltc. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 ltc circuit-number no x25 ltc
4-23
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. It the parameter is set to 0, you must set another X.25 parameter htc (the highest two-way VC number) to 0, indicating that the two-way VC is disabled.
Default
Default lowest two-way VC number is 1.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By default, the Quidway series of routers disable the use of the incoming-only and outgoing-only virtual circuit. Only the two-way range (1-1024) is kept for use. Please set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP. For VC range setting requirements, please consult Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration.
Example
! The following serial command configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables the incoming-only and two-way virtual circuits, and disables outgoing-only virtual circuit. When this serial commands are executed, the three ranges are [1, 9], [20, 25] and [0, 0], respectively. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 lic 1 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hic 9 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 20 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 25
Related Command
x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 loc
4.28 x25 map

To set up the LAN protocols-to-X.121 address mapping, use the command x25 map. To retract a prior mapping, use the no form of the command. x25 map { ip | ipx } protocol-address x.121-address [option] no x25 map { ip | ipx } protocol-address
4-24
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
protocol-type network protocol type of the address mapping. At present, X.25 of the Quidway series of routers supports both IP and IPX. protocol-address network protocol address of the remote host. x.121-address X.121 address of the remote host. option additional feature or user facility (optional)
Default
No mapping is set up.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The X.25 network has no protocol to dynamically detect the remote X.121 address. Therefore, you must specify the corresponding mapping for all the destination addresses before X.25 can work correctly. Once you have specified a mapping, all the contents of this mapping (including the protocol address, X.121 address and all the options) cannot be changed. To make any modification, you can first delete this mapping (with the no x25 map command), and then set up a new mapping. On the same X.25 interface, there should not be two or more mappings with the same protocol address (actually, the X.25 of the Quidway series of router will reject such a configuration). It is recommended that the X.121 addresses of all the mappings on a X.25 should be different from each other; otherwise, such configuration may have side effect on the system. The following table shows all the options and their meanings: Table LLC-4-2 Map Options Supported by X.25
Option accept-reverse broadcast cug group-number idle minutes lin logical-channel-number no-incoming no-outgoing nvc count packetsize in-size out-size Meaning Accept a call to this address map with a reverse-charged call request. If this option is not selected, all such requests will be cleared. Direct any broadcasts of network protocol and the multicast of IP to the destination. This option provides powerful support for some routing protocols (such as Routing Information Protocol). Specifies a closed user group number of an X.25 interface. Maximum period of idle time for the VC associate with the address map. 0 means that the idle time is infinite. Logic channel number of the address map in the backup center (please consult Backup Center Configuration. Deny call to the address map. Deny call originating from the address map. Maximum number of VCs for the map. When the address map is used to originate a call, it negotiates the maximum packet size with the remote end. The packetsize is counted in byte, which must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and must be the integer power of 2. Specifies reverse charging for outgoing calls. When the address map is used to originate a call, it negotiates throughput 4-25
reverse throughput in out
User Manual - Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform Option
Chapter 4
LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands Meaning with the remote end. The value of in/out is defined to 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 48000. When the address map is used to originate a call, it carries the maximum transmission transit delay request. When the address is used to originate a call, it negotiates the windowsize with the remote end. The in-size and out-size range between 1 and modulo size minus 1 of the X.25 interface where the address is mapped (including 1 and modulo size minus 1). Name of the ROA list configured through the X25 roa command in Global configuration mode on the X.25 interface.
transit-delay milliseconds windowsize in-size out-size
roa name
Example
! The following example sets two mappings on the X.25 interface Serial0 and Serial1 respectively. The attribute for each of the four mappings is different. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ip 202.38.160.11 20112451 reverse acceptreverse Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ip 202.38.160.138 20112450 packetsize 512 512 idle 10 Quidway(config)# interface serial 1 Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 map ipx 20.30.4.1 25112451 windowsize 4 4 broadcast Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ipx 20.30.4.8 25112450 no-incoming lin 6
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, show x25 map, x25 accept-reverse, x25 facility, x25 idle, x25 nvc
4.29 x25 modulo

To configure a packet numbering mode of an X.25 interface, use the command x25 modulo. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 modulo modulus no x25 modulo
Syntax Description
modulus modulo size, whose value is 8 or 128.
Default
modulo 8.
4-26
Chapter 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The slip window is the basis for X.25 traffic control, and the key about the slip window is that the sent packets are numbered cyclically in order and are to be acknowledged by the remote end. The order in numbering refers to the ascending order, like 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Cyclically means that the numbering starts again from the beginning when a certain number (called modulo) is reached. For example, when the modulo is 8, the numbering goes 4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1 X.25 defines two numbering modulus: 8 (also called the basic mode) and 128 (also called extended mode), and the X.25 of the Quidway series of routers supports both modes.
Example
! The following example sets the modulo on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 128. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 modulo 128
Related Command
show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 facility, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 win, x25 wout
4.30 x25 nvc

To set the maximum number of VCs that can be attached to all the address maps on the X.25 interface, use the command x25 nvc. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 nvc count no x25 nvc
Syntax Description
count number of VCs, ranging 1 to 8.
Default
1.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If you set this parameter to a value greater than 1, a new VC to the same destination will be created on the line with a greater transit delay when the output window and output queue of the VC are full. Otherwise the data will be dropped.
4-27
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example sets this parameter on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 3. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 nvc 3
Related Command
show interface, show 25 interface serial, x25 map
4.31 x25 ops

To set the maximum output packet size for an X.25 interface, use the command x25 ops. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 ops bytes no x25 ops
Syntax Description
bytes maximum output packet size in byte. The byte count can be a value of the following: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
Default
128 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Usually, the X.25 public data network has a maximum output packet size, and the size of a packet sent by the DTE shall not exceed this length (otherwise it will trigger the resetting of the VC). So, the DTEs at both the send and receive ends are required to have the fragmentation and reassembling function. That is, the DTE at the send end breaks the packets with larger size into more packets with the more data bit set except for the last. When the DTE at the receive end receives this series of fragments, it reassembles these fragments into a packet according to the M bit, and sends it to the upper-layer protocol. Please consult your ISP about this maximum input packet size. Normally, the maximum input packet size is equivalent to the maximum output packet. Unless with your ISPs permission, please do not set these two parameters to different values.
Example
! The following example sets the maximum input and output packet sizes on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 512 bytes. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ips 256 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ops 256
4-28
Chapter 4
Related Command
x25 facility, x25 ips, x25 pvc
4.32 x25 pvc (encapsulating)

To establish an encapsulation PVC, use the encapsulating version of the command x25 pvc. To delete the PVC, use the no form of the command. x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x.121-address [ option ] no x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x.121-address [ option ]
Syntax Description
pvc-number PVC number, which must be a positive integer ranges between 1 and 4095 (including 1 and 4095), and must be in the PVC range. protocol-type supported protocol of this PVC. protocol-address protocol address of the host at the other end of the PVC. x.121-address remote X.121 address of this PVC. option additional feature of this PVC (optional)
Default
By default, no encapsulation PVC is established. While creating a PVC, if you do not set the corresponding attributes, its traffic control parameter is the same as that on the X.25 interface (the traffic control parameter at an X.25 interface is set through such commands as x25 ips, x25 ops, x25 win, and x25 wout).
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
As a map is implied from the PVC configuration, it is not necessary (or impossible) to create a map first before creating PVCs. Before creating PVCs, you should first enable the PVC range. The range is between 1 and the lowest VC number minus 1(including 1 and the lowest VC number minus 1). Naturally, if the lowest VC number is 1, the PVC range will be disabled. The following table shows some typical PVC ranges. Table LLC-4-3 PVC channel intervals of typical configurations
One-way inbound channel interval [0, 0] [0, 0] [1, 10] [5, 10] [0, 0] [0, 0] Two-way channel interval [1, 1024] [10, 24] [15, 30] [15, 25] [0, 0] [0, 0] One-way outbound channel interval [0, 0] [0, 0] [0, 0] [30, 32] [20, 45] [0, 0] PVC channel interval Disabled [1, 9] Disabled [1, 4] [1, 19] [1, 4095]
4-29
Chapter 4
While setting this PVC, you can specify some of its attributes, like the traffic control parameter. The following table shows the options and their meanings. Table LLC-4-4 Options and meanings of PVC attributes
Option broadcast packetsize in-size out-size windowsize in-size out-size Meaning Broadcast to the remote end of this PVC. The maximum packet size of this PVC in byte. Both value must be one of the following value: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. Packet count for input window and output window for this PVC, which range from 1 to the modulo size minus 1 on the X.25 interface where this PVC is established (including 1 and modulo size minus 1).
Example
! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0, enables the PVC range, and finally set two VCs. Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 8 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 pvc 2 ip 202.38.168.1 20112451 broadcast packetsize 512 512 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 pvc 6 ip 202.38.168.3 20112453 broadcast windowsize 5 5
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, show x25, x25 map
4.33 x25 pvc (switched)

To configure a switched PVC route for a given interface, use the command x25 pvc. To delete the route, use the no form of the command. x25 pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2 [option] no x25 pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2
Syntax Description
pvc-number1 PVC number that will be used on the input interface. It is a positive integer, ranging 1 to 4095. pvc-number2 PVC number that will be used on the output interface. It is a positive integer, ranging 1 to 4095. Number Output interface number. option Adds certain features to the mapping specified.
4-30
Chapter 4
Default
No switched PVC is configured.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By configuring X.25 switching, you can use the Quidway series of routers as a simple X.25 switch. When the PVC switch is configured, the input and output interfaces must be encapsulated with X.25, and the PVCs specified at both interfaces already exists and is valid. Note that no PVC switch can be configured on the X.25 sub-interface.
Example
! The following example packet switches the first PVC on Serial0 and the first PVC on Serial1. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 dce ietf Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# encapsulation x25 dce ietf Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 pvc 1 in serial 0 pvc 1
Related Command
show x25 vc, x25 routing
4.34 x25 pvc (XOT)

To add a PVC route of XOT, use the command x25 pvc. To delete the PVC route of the appointed XOT, use the no form of the command. x25 pvc pvc-number1 xot ip-address interface interface-type interface-number pvc pvc-number2 [ xot-keepalive-period seconds xot-keepalive-tries times xot-source interface-name ] no x25 pvc pvc-number1
Syntax Description
pvc-number1 PVC number of the interface at this end, ranging 1 to 4095. pvc-number2 PVC number of the peer interface, ranging 1 to 4095. ip-address The destination IP address connected via XOT. interface-type Type of the peer interface. interface-number Number of the peer interface. seconds Delay of the keepalive timer connected via XOT. The timer sends keepalive packets when it is overtime to detect the usability of the connection. times The maximum failure time of sending keepalive. Disconnect the XOT link when the failure time exceeds times.
4-31
Chapter 4
interface-name The name of the interface initiating XOT connection at this end.
Default
No PVC route.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After the user configures the XOT switch command of X.25 PVC, he can implement the connection between local and remote X.25 net, spanning the IP net. After configuring keepalive, it can support the link detection of XOT.
Example
! Connect PVC1 of interface Serial0 (10.1.1.1) on the router RTA to PVC2 of interface Serial1 (10.1.1.2) on the peer router RTB via XOT tunnel, to implement packet switching. ! Configure on router RTA RTA(config-if-Ethernet0)#ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 RTA(config-if-Ethernet0)#interface serial 0 RTA(config-if-Serial0)#encapsulation x25 dce ietf RTA(config-if-Serial0)#x25 pvc 1 xot 10.1.1.2 interface serial 1 pvc 2 ! Configure on router RTB RTB(config-if-Ethernet0)#ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 RTB(config-if-Ethernet0)#interface serial 1 RTB(config-if-Serial1)#encapsulation x25 dce ietf RTB(config-if-Serial1)#x25 pvc 1 xot 10.1.1.1 interface serial 0 pvc 1
Related Command
show x25 vc x25 routing
4.35 x25 response-called-address

To sets the called DTE address field in outgoing calls while X.25 sends the call input packet, use the command x25 response-called-address. To reset this command to its default value, use the no form of the command. x25 response-called-address no x25 response-called-address
4-32
Chapter 4
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, the input packet of a call may or may not carry an address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables you to easily specify whether the input packet of a call sent by X.25 of the Quidway series routers carries the called DTE address.
Example
! The following example specifies that the input packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface Serial0 carries the called DTE address. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 response-called-address
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, x25 response-calling-address, x25 suppress-calledaddress, x25 suppress-calling-address
4.36 x25 response-calling-address

To sets the calling DTE address field in outgoing calls while X.25 sends the call input packet, use the command x25 response-calling-address. To reset this command to its default value, use the no form of the command. x25 response-calling-address no x25 response-calling-address
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, the input packet of a call may or may not carry an address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables you to easily specify whether the input packet of a call sent by X.25 of the Quidway series of routers carries the calling DTE address.
4-33
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example specifies that the input packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface Serial0 carries the calling DTE address Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 response-calling-address
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 suppress-calledaddress, x25 suppress-calling-address
4.37 x25 roa

To define the ROA list, use the command x25 roa. To delete a ROA list entry, use the no form the command. x25 roa roa-name id1 [ ,id2, id3] no x25 roa name id1 [ ,id2,id3]
Syntax Description
name ROA name. id ROA-specified ID which ranges from 0 through 9999. Multiple IDs can be specified.
Default
No x.25 roa is defined.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Multiple ROAs (0 to 20) can be configured, and multiple IDs (1 to 10) can be specified for each ROA. When an ROA is configured, it can be quoted by name in the x25 facility or x25 map command.
Example
! The following examples define two ROA lists, and then quote the list on serial interfaces 0 and 1. Quidway(config)# x25 roa list1 11 23 45 Quidway(config)# x25 roa list2 345 Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility roa list1 Quidway(config)# interface serial 1 Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 facility roa list2
4-34
Chapter 4
Related Command
x25 facility, x25 map
4.38 x25 route

To create a SVC static route, use the command x25 route. To delete one such route, use the no form of the command. x25 route x.121-address interface serial number no x25 route x.121-address
Syntax Description
x.121-address remote x.121-address number output interface number.
Default
No SVC static route is configured.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
By configuring the X.25 switch, you can use the Quidway series of routers as a simple X.25 switch. While configuring the SVC switch, you do not have to configure X.25 encapsulation on an outgoing interface. However, X.25 encapsulation on an outgoing interface is necessary before this SVC route takes effect.
Example
! The following example switches VC 1 to interface Serial0, and switches VC 2 to interface Serial1. Quidway(config)# x25 route 1 interface serial 0 Quidway(config)# x25 route 2 interface serial 1 Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 dce ietf Quidway(config)# interface serial 1 Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# encapsulation x25 dce ietf
Related Command
show x25 route, x25 routing
4-35
Chapter 4
4.39 x25 route (XOT)

To add a SVC route of XOT, use the command x25 route. To delete the SVC route of the appointed XOT, use the no form of the command. x25 route dest-address xot ip-address [ xot-keepalive-period seconds ] [ xotkeepalive-tries times ] [ xot-source interface-name ] no x25 route dest-address xot ip-address [ xot-keepalive-period seconds ] [ xotkeepalive-tries times ] [ xot-source interface-name ]
Syntax Description
dest-address the number of virtual circuit. ip-address the destination ip-address connected via XOT. seconds delay of the keepalive timer connected via XOT. When it is time out, the timer sends keepalive packets to check the usability of the link. times the maximum failure time of sending keepalive. When the time exceeds times, disconnect the XOT link. interface-name the name of the interface initiating the XOT link.
Default
Seconds and times are 0.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After the user configures the XOT switch command of X.25 SVC, he can implement the connection between local and remote X.25 net, spanning the IP net. After configuring keepalive, it can support the link inspection.
Example
! Switch virtual circuit1 to the destination ip-address 10.1.1.1 Quidway(config)# x25 route 1 xot 10.1.1.1
Related Command
show x25 route x25 routing
4.40 x25 routing

To enabling X.25 switching, use the command x25 routing. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. x25 routing
4-36
Chapter 4
no x25 routing
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The X.25 packet switch is to receive packets from an X.25 interface, and send them from a certain interface according to the destination information contained in the packet. When the packet-layer switching function is enabled, the router can serve as a small packet switch.
Example
! The following example enables the X.25 switching function. Quidway(config)# x25 routing
Related Command
x25 pvc, x25 route, show x25 vc, show x25 route
4.41 x25 suppress-called-address

To omit the X.121 address of the called DTE in outgoing calls while X.25 originates the call, use the command of x25 suppress-called-address. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. x25 suppress-called-address no x25 suppress-called-address
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, the call request packet must carry the address code group. But in some occasions, the X.25 call request does not have to carry the called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. This command enables you to specify whether the call request sent by X.25 in the Quidway series of routers carries the called DTE address.
4-37
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example suppresses or omits the called address in call request packet sent from the X.25 interface on Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 suppress-called-address
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-callingaddress x25 , suppress-calling-address
4.42 x25 suppress-calling-address

To omit the X.121 address of the calling DTE in outgoing calls while X.25 originates the call, use the command of x25 suppress-calling-address. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. x25 suppress-calling-address no x25 suppress-calling-address
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, the call request packet must carry the address code group. But in some occasions, the X.25 call request does not have to carry the called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. This command enables you to specify whether the call request sent by X.25 in the Quidway series of routers carries the calling DTE address.
Example
! The following example suppresses or omits the calling address in call request packet sent from the X.25 interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 suppress-calling-address
Related Command
show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-callingaddress x25, suppress-called-address
4.43 x25 threshold

To set the maximum number of input packets before X.25 send an acknowledgement, use the command of x25 threshold. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.
4-38
Chapter 4
no x25 threshold count no x25 threshold
Syntax Description
count Count of packets that can be received before the acknowledgement, ranging 0 and to input windowsize. If it is set to 0 or the windowsize, this function will be disabled. If it is set to 1, X.25 of the Quidway series of routers will send an acknowledgement for each correct packet received.
Default
0 packet.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After enabling this function, the Quidway series of routers can send acknowledgement to the remote router upon the receipt of correct packets, even if the input window is not yet full. If there is not many data traffic in your application environment, you can appropriately adjust this parameter to meet the requirement.
Example
! The following example specifies that each VC on the X.25 interface Serial0 acknowledges the receipt of each correct packet. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 threshold 1
Related Command
x25 win, x25 wout
4.44 x25 tx0

To set the delay value of the X.25 restart indication retransmission timer on DTE (or DCE) devices, use the command x25 tx0. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 tx0 seconds no x25 tx0
Syntax Description
seconds delay value for the X.25 restart indication retransmission timer in second.
Default
Default delay on the X.25 DTE restart timer is 180 seconds and that on the DCE timer is 60 seconds.
4-39
Chapter 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a restart request (or a DCE sends a restart indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of this timer before timeout.
Example
! The following example sets the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 120 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 tx0 120
Related Command
x25 tx1, x25 tx2, x25 tx3
4.45 x25 tx1

To set the delay value of Call Request Indication Retransmission timer on DTE/DCE devices, use the command x25 tx1. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 tx1 seconds no x25 tx1
Syntax Description
seconds delay value of Call Request Indication Retransmission timer in second.
Default
Default value for the call request retransmission timer on a DTE is 200 seconds; default value for the call request retransmission timer on a DCE is 180 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a call request (or a DCE sends a call indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of this timer before timeout.
4-40
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example sets the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 100 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 tx1 100
Related Command
x25 tx0, x25 tx2, x25 tx3
4.46 x25 tx2

To set the delay value for reset indication retransmission timer on a DTE/DCE, use the command x25 tx2. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 tx2 seconds no x25 tx2
Syntax Description
seconds Delay value of the reset indication retransmission timer in second.
Default
Default value for the reset request retransmission timer on a DTE is 180 seconds; default value for the reset request retransmission timer on a DCE is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a reset request (or a DCE sends a reset indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of this timer before the timeout.
Example
! The following example sets the reset timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 120 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 tx2 120
Related Command
x25 tx0, x25 tx1, x25 tx3
4-41
Chapter 4
4.47 x25 tx3

To set the delay value for clear indication retransmission timer on a DTE/DCE, use the command x25 tx3. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 tx3 seconds no x25 tx3
Syntax Description
seconds Delay value of the clear indication retransmission timer in second.
Default
Default value for the clear indication retransmission timer on a DTE is 180 seconds; default value for the clear indication retransmission timer on a DCE is 60 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a clear request (or a DCE sends a clear indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of this timer before the timeout.
Example
! The following example sets the delay value of clear indication retransmission timer on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 100 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 tx3 100
Related Command
x25 tx0, x25 tx1, x25 tx2
4.48 x25 use-source-address

To change the calling address as the local address while setting the call-forwarding packets, use the command x25 use-source-address. To disable the function, use the no form of the command. x25 use-source-address no x25 use-source-address
Default
Disabled.
4-42
Chapter 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If you connect your private X.25 data network to the X.25 public data network via the Quidway router, and if your private network has an internal private address, this function is necessary. Any call originated from a host inside any private network and whose destination is not in this private network will be forwarded to the public data network. So, this call should have a legal, unified public data network address. When this function is enabled, the source addresses of such calls will be replaced by the X.121 address (i.e., legal X.121 address recognized by the public data network) on the interface of the public data network to which the Quidway router is connected. In this way, the internetworking is implemented between the private and public data networks.
Example
! The following example enables the router work in switched mode, and all the source addresses of the calls forwarded from the X.25 interface Serial0 will be replaced by 012020112451. Quidway(config)# x25 routing Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 address 012020112451 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 use-source-address
Related Command
show x25 interface, x25 address
4.49 x25 win

To set the incoming windowsize on the X.25 interface, use the command x25 win. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 win packets no x25 win
Syntax Description
packets size of the incoming window, ranging 1 to one less than the window modulus. (including 1 and one less than the modulus).
Default
Default incoming windowsize on the X.25 interface is 2 packets.
Command Mode
4-43
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
This parameter specifies the maximum count of correct packets received before X.25 sends correct acknowledgement. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater the windowsize is, the higher the transmission efficiency. Please consult your ISP about the incoming and outgoing windowsize. Unless supported by the network, do not set these two parameters to different values.
Example
! The following example sets the incoming and outgoing windowsizes on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 5. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 win 5 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 wout 5
Related Command
show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 threshold, x25 wout
4.50 x25 wout

To set the outgoing window size on X.25 interface, use the command x25 wout. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command. x25 wout packets no x25 wout
Syntax Description
packets size of the outgoing windowsize, ranging 1 to one less than the modulus (including 1 and one less than the modulus).
Default
Default outgoing windowsize on the X.25 interface is 2.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This parameter specifies the maximum count of correct packets received before X.25 sends correct acknowledgements. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater the windowsize is, the higher the transmission efficiency. Please consult your ISP about the incoming and outgoing windowsizes. Unless supported by the network, do not set these two parameters to the different values.
4-44
Chapter 4
Example
! The following example sets the incoming and outgoing windowsizes on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 5. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 win 5 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 wout 5
Related Command
show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 threshold, x25 win
4.51 show x25 alias

To configure an X.25 interface to accept all reverse charge calls, use the command show x25 alias. show x25 alias
Command Mode
Privileged user mode.
Usage Guideline
This command can be used to show all the aliases set for all the X.25 interfaces.
Example
! The following example displays the X.25 alias table. Quidway# show x25 alias
Alias for Serial0: Alias for Serial1: Alias1: $20112405$ Alias2: $20112450 Alias3: 20112450$ strict left right
The above information indicates that, no alias is set for Serial0; 3 aliases are set for Serial1, and they are $20112405$ (matching mode: strict), $20112405 (matching mode: left alignment), and 20112405$ (matching mode: right alignment).
Related Command
show x25 interface, x25 alias
4.52 show x25 interface

To display the X.25 interface information, use the command show x25 interface. show x25 interface serial [number]
4-45
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
number interface serial number.
Default
If no interface serial number is specified, the information about all X.25 interfaces will be displayed.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After configuring some X.25 parameters and attributes, or enabling or disabling some X.25 functions, you can use the command to view the result of your operation and obtain the related X.25 configuration information on this interface.
Example
! The following is sample output about X.25 interface Serial0 from the command. Quidway# show x25 interface serial 0
Encapsulation X.25 DTE IETF, address is , state Ready, modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 2/2, packet sizes 128/128 Channels: Incoming-only 0-0, Two-way 1-1024, Outgoing-only 0-0 Timers: T20 180, T21 200, T22 180, T23 180, T28 300, Idle_Timer 0 New configuration(will be effective after restart): modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 2/2, packet sizes 128/128 Channels: Incoming-only 0-0, Two-way 1-1024, Outgoing-only 0-0 Statistic: Restarts 0 (Restart Collisions 0) Refused Incoming Call 0, Failing Outgoing Call 0 input/output: RESTART 0/0 CALL 0/0 DIAGNOSE 0/0 DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Invalid Pr: 0 Invalid Ps: 0 Unknown: 0 LAPB DTE, module 8, k 7, N1 2104, N2 5 timer: T1 2000, T2 1000, T3 0 (milliseconds) state DISCONNECT, VS 0, VR 0, Remote VR 0 IFRAME 0/0, RR 0/0, RNR 0/0, REJ 0/0 FRMR 0/0, SABM 0/0, DM 0/0, UA 0/0 DISC 0/0, invalid ns 0, invalid nr 0, link resets 0
4-46
Chapter 4
Table LLC-4-5 LAPB information displayed via show x25 interface command
Field Encapsulation LAPB LAPB DTE module 8 k7 N1 12032 N2 5 timer: state VS VR Remote VR IFRAME 0/0 ... DISC 0/0 Invalid Ns Invalid Nr Link Resets Meaning The current encapsulation protocol on this interface is LAPB protocol. This LAPB interface works in DTE mode. The information frame and monitor frame sent by this LAPB interface is numbered in modulo 8 mode. The LAPB window size on this interface is 7. The maximum frame size that can be sent by this LAPB interface is 12032 bits. The maximum number of times that the LAPB information frames can be retransmitted by this interface is 5. Delay values of the LAPB timers on this interface in second. Current state of this LAPB interface. Outgoing variable on this LAPB interface. Incoming variables on this LAPB interface. Final verification of remote information frame received by LAPB on this interface. Statistics of frames received and transmitted on this interface; format: frames received/frames transmitted. LAPB erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming information frames with numbering errors. LAPB erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming information frames and monitor frames with numbering errors. Number of LAPB link reset times on this interface.
Table LLC-4-6 X.25 information displayed via the show x25 interface command
Field Encapsulation X.25 DTE IETF address is state modulo input/output: window sizes... Channels: Timers: New Configuration Restarts 0 ( Restart Collision 0) Refused Incoming Call Failing Outgoing Call Input/output: RESTART 0/0... REJ 0/0 Invalid Ps Invalid Pr Unknown Meaning The encapsulation protocol on this interface is X.25, which works in DTE mode; the datagram encapsulation format is IETF X.121 address of this X.25 interface; if there is no such an address, this field is blank. Current state of this X.25 interface. All the data packets and traffic control packets sent from this X.25 interface are numbered in modulo 8 mode Traffic control parameters for this X.25 interface, including the window size, outgoing window size, maximum incoming packet size (in byte), and maximum outgoing packet size (in byte). Division of channels for this X.25 interface: they are incoming-only channel, two-way channel, and outgoing channel. If both values of a range are 0, this area is disabled. The delay values of the timers on this X.25 interface in second. New configuration on this X.25 interface that will take effect when the system is restarted. If there is error in it, it will restore to the default values. Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of restart times (including the number of collisions after the restart) Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of times for the incoming calls refused Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of outgoing calls failed Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of packets incoming or outgoing, the format: number of incoming packets/number of outgoing packets Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packets with numbering errors. Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packets and traffic control packets with numbering errors. Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packets that cannot be resolute.
4-47
Chapter 4
Related Command
show interface
4.53 show x25 map

To display the X.25 address maps, use the command show x25 map. show x25 map
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The X.25 address map can be configured in two approaches: special configuration (through the x25 map command) or implied configuration (through the x25 pvc command). The show x25 map command can be used to show all the address maps.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show x25 map
Serial0: X.121 20112450 <--> ip 202.38.165.19 No VC attched Facility: ACCEPT_REVERSE; BROADCAST; PACKET_SIZE: I 512 O 512 ; SVC_MAP
Serial1: X.121 20112451 <--> ip 202.38.166.20 PVC_MAP 1 VC: 3* Facility: BROADCAST; WINDOW_SIZE: I 5 O 5 ; The following table explains with detail the meanings of the fields in the above address map information.
Table LLC-4-7 X.25 address map information

Field Serial0 X.121 20112451 ip 202.38.165.19 SVC_MAP 1 VC: 3* Facility Meaning Name of the X.25 interface on which this map is configured X.121 address of the destination of this address map Protocol type and address of the destination of the higher-level protocol mapped to the remote host Type of this address map: SVC_MAP stands for a SVC address map; PVC_MAP stands for a PVC address map. There is only one virtual circuit related with this address map, whose number is 3; if there is no virtual circuit attach to this address map, this field is set to No VC attached Option for this address map. For example, Broadcast means that broadcast enabled via this address map
Related Command
x25 map, x25 pvc, show x25 interface
4-48
Chapter 4
4.54 show x25 switch-vc-table

To display the X.25 SVC table, use the command show x25 switch-vc-table. show x25 switch-vc-table
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used for displaying the condition of the X.25 switched virtual circuit.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway(config)# show x25 switch-vc-table
# 1 # 2 (In: Serial0-vc1024) (In: Serial1-vc1024) (Out: Serial1-vc1) (Out: Serial0-vc1)
The above information indicates that there are two records in the current switched virtual circuit: in from virtual circuit 1024 on Serial0, and out from virtual circuit 1 on interface Serial1. in from virtual circuit 1024 on Serial1, and out from virtual circuit 1 on interface Serial0.
Related Command
x25 pvc, x25 route
4.55 show x25 route

To display the X.25 routing table, use the command show x25 route. show x25 route
Command Mode
Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, interface configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, etc.
Usage Guideline
Information shown via this command includes: virtual circuit number and its switch interface.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway(config)# show X25 route
Number X.121 CUD FowardTo
4-49

# 1 # 2 1 2
Chapter 4
Serial0 Serial1
The above information indicates that, the call whose destination X.121 is 1 will be switched to Serial0 for an output, and the call whose destination X.121 address is 2 will be switched to Serial1 for an output.
Related Command
show x25 interface, x25 routing, x25 pvc, x25 route
4.56 show x25 vc

To display information about the X.25 virtual circuit, use the command show x25 vc. show x25 vc [ lcn ]
Syntax Description
lcn logic channel number.
Default
If no logic channel number is specified, all the virtual circuits will be displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, interface configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, etc.
Usage Guideline
SVC (switched virtual circuit) is set up temporarily by X.25 through call connection when data transmission is required. PVC is configured manually, and exists regardless of the data transmission requirement. When the router works in X.25 switched mode, virtual circuits will be set up for transmission of the switched data. The information about these virtual circuits can be shown via this command, only some fields in the displayed information differ.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show x25 vc
SVC 1, State:TRANSFER, Interface: Serial0 Started: 1998-1-1 1:48:11, Last input: 0:45:57, Last output: 0:45:59 Connects: X.121 20112450 <--> ip 202.38.165.19 Window size: input 5 output 5 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 PS: 0 PR: 0 ACK: 0 Remote PR: 0 RCNT: 0 RNR: FALSE Reset times: 0 input/output: DATA 1154/1022 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 1569732/1435638 RR 143/165 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Snd Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0 Rcv Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0 PVC 3, State:TRANSFER, Interface: Serial1 ed: 1998-1-1 1:48:11, Last input: 0:30:09, Last output: 0:30:17 Connects: X.121 20112451 <--> ip 202.38.166.20
4-50
Chapter 4
Window size: input 5 output 5 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 PS: 0 PR: 0 ACK: 0 Remote PR: 0 RCNT: 0 RNR: FALSE Reset times: 0 input/output: DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Snd Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0 Rcv Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0
The above information indicates that: on the X.25 interface Serial0, there exists a SVC whose number is 1; on the X.25 interface Serial1, there exists a PVC whose number is 3. The following table offers the description of the fields in the above information: Table LLC-4-8 Information about X.25 virtual circuit
Field SVC 1 State Interface Started Last input Last output Meaning The type and number of the virtual circuit. SVC stands for the switched virtual circuit, and PVC for the permanent virtual circuit Current state of the virtual circuit Name of the interface on which the virtual circuit is established Time elapsed since the VC was created. Format: : year-month-day hour: minute: second Time of last input (when the show x25 vc is executed) on the virtual circuit. Format: hour: minute: second Shows time of the last output (when the show x25 vc is executed) on the virtual circuit. Format: hour: minute: second If the router is the start / end point (that is, the router does not work in X.25 switched mode), this field indicates the address map attached to this virtual circuit. If the virtual circuit is set up for switching (that is, the router works in switched mode), this field describes the type and number of the VC on another X.25 interface attached to this VC. For example, Serial1 SVC 1024 indicates that this VC is attached to SVC1024 on the X.25 interface Serial1 The incoming window size and outgoing window size of this VC The maximum packet size of this VC Variable currently sent on this VC Variable current received on this VC Current acknowledgement variable on this VC Last acknowledgement from the far end on this VC Count of unacknowledged output packets If this VC is in the Receiver Not Ready status. TRUE indicate that it is in this status, and FALSE indicates that it is not in this status Number of VC reset times Statistics about this VC, including the input and output packets, and the total bytes of all the data packets Current status of the output queue of this VC: maximum hold size, current queue length, and packets dropped due to a full queue Current status of the input queue of this VC: maximum hold size, current queue length, and packets dropped due to a full queue
Connects
Window size Packet size Vs Vr ACK Remote Vr RCNT RNR Reset times input/output: DATA...REJ 0/0 Snd Queue Rcv Queue
Related Command
clear x25 vc, show x25 interface serial, x25 pvc
4.57 debug x25 xot

To enable the XOT debugging information output, use the command debug x25 xot [ all | event | packet ] debug x25 xot [ all | event | packet ]
4-51
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
all Enable all the XOT debugging information output. event Enable the XOT event debugging information output. packet Enable the XOT packet debugging information output.
Default
Disable all the XOT debugging information output.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After enabling the XOT packet debugging information output, all the packets received and sent by XOT will be output. After enabling the XOT event debugging information output, all the XOT events will be output.
Example
! Enable all the XOT debugging information output. Quidway# debug x25 xot all
Related Command
debug all show debugging logging on logging console
4-52
Chapter 5
Frame Relay Commands
Chapter 5 Frame Relay Commands

Frame relay commands include: clear frame-relay-inarp encapsulation frame-relay frame-relay interface-dlci frame-relay intf-type frame-relay inverse-arp frame-relay ip tcp header-compress frame-relay local-dlci frame-relay lmi-n391dte frame-relay lmi-n392dce frame-relay lmi-n392dte frame-relay lmi-n393dce frame-relay lmi-n393dte frame-relay lmi-t391dte frame-relay lmi-t392dce frame-relay lmi-type frame-relay map frame-relay route frame-relay switching show frame-relay lmi show frame-relay map show frame-relay packet show frame-relay pvc show frame-relay route show frame-relay status show frame-relay traffic debug frame-traffic
5.1 clear frame-relay-inarp

To clear all the Frame Relay maps created by the use of Inverse Address Resolution Protocol, use the clear frame-relay-inarp command. clear frame-relay-inarp
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some special circumstances, the change of the network architecture will cause the failure of the dynamic Frame Relay map that originally created and it is necessary to create it again. You can use this command to clear all the dynamically created maps.
Example
! The following example clears all the dynamic frame relay maps.
5-1
Chapter 5
Quidway# clear frame-relay-inarp
Related Command
frame-relay inverse-arp
5.2 encapsulation frame-relay

To enable Frame Relay encapsulation, use the encapsulation frame-relay Interface configuration command. encapsulation frame-relay [ ietf | cisco-compatible ]
Syntax Description
ietf Sets the encapsulation method to comply with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard. This is the default encapsulation. cisco-compatible Sets the encapsulation method to comply with Cisco.
Default
Default link-layer protocol encapsulation on the interface is PPP. Default frame-relay protocol encapsulation is IETF.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In the Quidway series of routers, the frame relay encapsulation can either be the IETF or cisco-compatible. IETF encapsulation conforms with RFC1294, that is, support IETF standard; cisco-compatible encapsulation method is the same as that used in the Cisco router.
Example
! The following example configures Frame Relay encapsulation on interface Serial0 and the default ietf encapsulation is used. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay
Related Command
show interface
5.3 frame-relay interface-dlci

To assign a data link connection identifier to a specified Frame Relay main interface or sub-interface, use frame-relay interface-dlci Interface configuration command. To remove this assignment, use the no form of this command. frame-relay interface-dlci dlci
5-2
Chapter 5
no frame-relay interface-dlci dlci
Syntax Description
dlci DLCI number to be used on the specified FR main interface or sub-interface.
Command Mode
Default
No DLCI is assigned.
Usage Guideline
Functionally this command is similar to the frame-relay local-dlci command, with the difference that frame-relay local-dlci can only specify a DLCI for the main interface while frame-relay interface-dlci can specify a DLCI for both the main interface and sub-interface. While configuring the frame relay main interface, you only specify the DLCIs at the DCE side. While configuring the frame relay sub-interface, you must specify the DLCIs at the DCE and DTE sides at the same time
Example
! The following example assigns a DLCI 100 to Frame Relay sub-interface Serial0.1. Quidway(config-if-Serial0.1)# frame-relay interface-dlci 100
Related Command
encapsulation frame-relay
5.4 frame-relay intf-type

To set the Frame Relay terminal type, use the frame-relay intf-type. To restore to the default Frame Relay terminal type, use the no form of the command. frame-relay intf-type { dte | dce | nni } no frame-relay intf-type
Syntax Description
dte, dce and nni are three FR operations.
Default
DTE
Command Mode
5-3
Chapter 5
Usage Guideline
In frame relay, there are two communicating parties, namely, the user side and network side. The user side is called data terminal equipment (DTE), and the network side is called as data communications equipment (DCE). The frame relay interface of the Quidway series of routers can either work in DTE mode or DCE mode. If two routers are connected back to back, then one is DCE, and the other is DTE. If a router is connected to the frame relay switch, then the router should work in DTE mode. If a certain frame relay interface is required to support the PVC switch, it is then necessary to set the operation mode of this interface to NNI, and the corresponding interface at the remote router should be set to NNI accordingly. Note that, to configure DCE or NNI, you first need to enable the frame-relay switching in Global configuration.
Example
! The following example configures the frame relay interface Serial0 working in the DCE mode. Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce
Related Command
encapsulation frame-relay, frame-relay switching
5.5 frame-relay inverse-arp

To dynamically enable the Inverse Address Resolution Protocol, use frame-relay inverse-arp command. To disable the use of protocol, use the no form of the command. frame-relay inverse-arp [ ip | ipx ] [ dlci ] no frame-relay inverse-arp [ ip | ipx ] [ dlci ]
Syntax Description
ip IP is supported for inverse address resolution . ipx IPX is supported for inverse address resolution . dlci data link connection identifier number, indicating that inverse address resolution is performed for this DLCI number only.
Default
Disabled.
Command Mode
5-4
Chapter 5
Usage Guideline
When frame relay sends data over the interface, it is also necessary to map the network address to the DLCI numbers. Such a map can be specified manually or can be completed via the function of automatic inverse address resolution.
Example
! The following example enable inverse address resolution only on IP at the frame relay main interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay inverse-arp ip
Related Command
frame-relay map, clear frame-relay inverse-arp, show frame-relay map
5.6 frame-relay ip tcp header-compress

To enable the compression of TCP/IP packet header, use the command frame-relay ip tcp header-compress. To disable the compression of TCP/IP packet header, use no form of the command. frame-relay ip tcp header-compress [ passive ] no frame-relay ip tcp header-compress
Syntax Description
passive Passive compression mode will be used on the interface.
Default
Active header compression
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
TCP/IP header compression is supported by frame relay protocol. Only when the Frame Relay encapsulation is cisco-compatible can TCP/IP header compression be enabled. TCP/IP header compression can either be specified on an interface or be specified when configuring the static mapping.
Example
! The following example configures serial interface0 to use the passive TCP/IP header compression. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay ip tcp head-compress passive
5-5
Chapter 5
5.7 frame-relay lmi-n391dte

To set a PVC status counter, use the command frame-relay lmi-n391dte. To restore to the default value of PVC status counter, use the no form of the command. frame-relay lmi-n391dte n391-value no frame-relay lmi-n391dte n391-value
Syntax Description
n391-value counter value of the PVC status. Acceptable value is a positive integer in the range of 1 through 10.
Default
Default is 3 errors.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet set by T391 at regular interval to the DCE. There are two types of Status-Enquiry packets: link integrity authentication packet and link status enquiry packet. The N391 parameter defines the ratio of the two outgoing packets, that is, link integrity authentication packets: link status enquiry packets = (N391-1): 1.
Example
! The following example sets DTE as the operation on frame relay interface Serial0, and the counter value of the PVC status request to 8. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dte Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n391dte 8
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t391dte
5.8 frame-relay lmi-n392dce

To set LMI error threshold on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n392dce. To remove the current setting, use the no form of the command. frame-relay lmi-n392dce n392dce-value frame-relay lmi-n392dce
5-6
Chapter 5
Syntax Description
n392dce-value LMI error threshold on a DCE. Acceptable value is a positive integer in the range of 1 through 10.
Default
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval (decided by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, the DCE would declare the physical channels and all the DLCI to be down. N392 and N393 together, define the error threshold. N393 indicates the event count observed and N392 indicates the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, if error count that occurred to the DEC is up to N392 in N393 time intervals, DCE will consider the errors have exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be down. N392 should be less than N393.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCE mode and sets N392 to 4. Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n393dce 4
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dce

To set the error threshold on a DTE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n392dte. To remove the current setting, use the no form of the command. frame-relay lmi-n392dte n392dte-value no frame-relay lmi-n392dte
5-7
Chapter 5
Syntax Description
n392dte-value LMI error threshold on a DTE. Acceptable value is a positive integer in the range of 1 through 10.
Default
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392) to the DCE. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a Status-Enquiry packet. If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet in the specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, then the DCE will declare the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be down. N392 and N393 together, define the error threshold. N393 defines the event count observed and N392 defines the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, if N392 errors occur to N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DEC, the DCE will consider that the error count reached the threshold and declares physical channels and all DLCIs to be down. N392 should be less than N393.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTE mode and sets N392 to 5. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dte Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n392dte 5
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dte
5.10 frame-relay lmi-n393dce

To set the LMI event counter value on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmin393dce. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command. frame-relay lmi-n393dce n393dce-value no frame-relay lmi-n393dce
Syntax Description
n393dce-value LMI event counter value on a DCE. Acceptable value is a positive integer in the range of 1 through 10.
5-8
Chapter 5
Default
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, the DCE would declare that the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be down. N392 and N393 together define the error threshold. N393 defines the event count observed and N392 defines the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, if error count that occurred to the DEC is up to N392 in N393 time intervals, DCE will consider the errors have exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be down. N392 should be less than N393.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCE mode and sets N393 to 4. Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n393dce 4
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dce

To set the LMI event counter value on a DtE, use the command frame-relay lmin393dte. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command. frame-relay lmi-n393dte n393-value no frame-relay lmi-n393dte
Syntax Description
n393dte-value LMI event counter value on a DTE. Acceptable value is a positive integer in the range of 1 through 10.
5-9
Chapter 5
Default
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392) to the DCE to inquire the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a Status-Response packet. If the DCE does not receive the acknowledgement in the specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, the DTE will declare that the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be down. N392 and N393 together, define the error threshold. N393 indicates the event count observed and N392 indicates the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, if N392 errors occur to N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DCE, the DCE would consider that the error count reached the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be down. N392 should be less than N393.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTE mode and sets N393 to 5. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dte Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n393dte 5
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n392dte
5.12 frame-relay lmi-t391dte

To set the polling timer value on a DTE, use the command frame-relay lmi-t391dte. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command. frame-relay lmi-t391dte t391dte-value frame-relay lmi-t391dte
Syntax Description
t391dte-value value of the polling timer. It can be a value in the range of 5s through 30s.
Default
15s.
5-10
Chapter 5
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This parameter defines the time interval for DTE sending the Status-Enquiry packet.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTE and sets T391 to 15 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dte Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-t391dte 15
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t392dce
5.13 frame-relay lmi-t392dce

To set the polling timer value on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmi-t392dce. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command. frame-relay lmi-t392dce t392-value no frame-relay lmi-t392dce
Syntax Description
t392dce-value value of the polling timer on a DCE. It can be a value in the range of 5s through 30s.
Default
15s.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This parameter defines the maximum time for DCE waiting for a Status-Enquiry, where T392 should be greater than T391.
Example
! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCE mode and set T392 to 16s. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce
5-11
Chapter 5
Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-t392dce 15
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t391dte
5.14 frame-relay lmi-type

To select the LMI type, use the command frame-relay lmi-type. To return to the default LMI type, use the no form of the command. frame-relay lmi-type { cisco-compatible | ansi | q933a } frame-relay lmi-type
Syntax Description
cisco-compatible LMI type compatible with the Cisco standard. ansi Annex D defined by ANSI T1.617. q933a ITU-T Q.933 Annex A.
Default
q933a .
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The Quidway series of routers usually supports three LMI protocols, that is, Q.933 Annex A, Annex D of ANSI T1.617 and CISCO-compatible LMI.
Example
! The following example sets the FR LIMI type of Serial0 to Q.933 Annex A. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-type q933a
Related Command
show interface
5.15 frame-relay local-dlci

To set a DLCI number for Frame Relay main interface, use frame-relay local-dlci command. To delete a DLCI number for Frame Relay main interface, use the no form of the command. frame-relay local-dlci dlci no frame-relay local-dlci dlci
5-12
Chapter 5
Syntax Description
dlci Local DLCI number of the Frame Relay main interface.
Default
No DLCI number is set.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The FR DLCi is determined at the DCE side, so it is unnecessary to configure this parameter at the DTE side.
Example
! The following example specifies the FR interface operation as DCE and the DLCI number as 100 and 200 Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching Quidway(config)# interface serial 0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay local-dlci 100 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay local-dlci 200
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type
5.16 frame-relay map

To add an entry of FR static mapping, use frame-relay map. Use the no form of the command to delete an entry. frame-relay map { ip | ipx } protocol-address dlci [ broadcast ] [ cisco-compatible | ietf ] [ lin logical-number ] [ nocompress | tcp header-compress [ active | passive ] ] no frame-relay map { ip | ipx } protocol-address dlci
Syntax Description
ip and ipx Frame Relay supported network protocol. protocol-address Destination protocol address. dlci DLCI number used to connect to. Broadcast broadcast is supported.
5-13
Chapter 5
cisco-compatible FR interface encapsulation is compatible with that of Cisco ietf FR interface encapsulation adopts the ietf method lin logical-number Indicate where the logical channel the interface is attached nocompress Prohibit the interface to use the TCP/IP header compression tcp header-compress active Active header compression is used tcp header-compress passive Passive header compression is used
Default
Dynamic inverse address resolution enabled.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The mapping can be manually created or can be completed via the inverse address resolution protocol. Manually configure the static mapping when there are few remote hosts or there is a default route. When the remote router supports inverse address resolution protocol and the network is rather complex, dynamically create the mapping via the inverse address resolution protocol.
Example
! The following example maps the destination IP address of the router 202.38.163.252 to local interface serial0. There is a DLCI = 50 on local Serial0 connected to this router. Configure the static mapping: Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay map ip 202.38.163.252 50
Related Command
show frame-relay map, frame-relay inverse-arp
5.17 frame-relay route

To configure Frame Relay route for PVC switching, use the command frame-relay route. To remove the route, use the no form of the command. frame-relay route in-dlci interface serial number out-dlci no frame-relay route in-dlci
Syntax Description
in-dlci DLCI on which the packet is received on the interface number interface number of packet forwarded by a router out-dlci DLCI on which the packet is forwarded by a router on the specified interface.
5-14
Chapter 5
Default
No route is specified.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Before the static route of FR PVC is configured, it is necessary to enable the FR PVC switching first by using the command frame-relay switching.
Example
! The following example configures a static route that allows packets in DLCI 100 on Seiral1 and transmits packets out over DLCI 200 on interface Serial2. Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# frame-relay route 100 interface Serial2 200
Related Command
show frame-relay route, frame-relay switching
5.18 frame-relay switching

To enable PVC switching on a frame relay DCE or an NNI interface, use the command frame-relay switching. Use the no form of the command to disable switching. frame-relay switching no frame-relay switching
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Quidway series of routers can be used as Frame Relay switch and perform FR PVC switching. After enabling PVC switching on a frame relay DCE or an NNI interface, it is necessary to configure a route for PVC switching.
Example
! The following example enables PVC switching on FR interface. Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching
Related Command
frame-relay route
5-15
Chapter 5
5.19 show frame-relay lmi

To display statistics about the Q.933, use the command show frame-relay lmi. show frame-relay lmi
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The Q.933 signaling frame is used to maintain the current frame relay link, including the status enquiry packet and status packet. Such information helps the user to diagnose the fault.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command show frame-relay lmi. Quidway# show frame-relay lmi
LMI Statistics for Serial0(interface type: DTE) 100 status enquiry sent, 100 status received 0 status discarded, 0 status timeouts
The above information indicates that: The terminal type of the FR encapsulation on this serial interface is DTE. 100 Status Enquiry packet have been sent and 100 Status packets are received. No Status Packet is dropped and there is no timeout for waiting for the Status Packet.
Related Command
frame-relay intf-type
5.20 show frame-relay map

To display the current FR mapping table, use the command show frame-relay map. show frame-relay map
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The displayed information of the command indicates whether the static mapping configured by the user is correct and whether the dynamic mapping operates normally.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay map
Serial0(protocol is down): ip 1.1.1.1 100, static
5-16

ip 2.2.2.2 200, dynamic
Chapter 5
The above information indicates that: the FR protocol status on this serial interface has not yet been enabled. There are two IP addresses maps to the DLCI: one is the manually configured mapping from 1.1.1.1 to 100, and the other is the automatically generated mapping from 2.2.2.2 to 200. Table LLC-5-1 Information in frame relay address map
Field static dynamic Meaning The mapping relation is manually configured. The mapping relation is automatically generated via the inverse address resolution protocol.
Related Command
frame-relay map, frame-relay inverse-arp
5.21 show frame-relay packet

To display the Frame Relay statistics about the incoming and outgoing packets, use the command show frame-relay packet. show frame-relay packet
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The output information of this command can help the user to make FR traffic statistics, fault diagnosis, etc.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay packet
Frame-relay packet statistics for interface Serial0: 7001 packet input, 96848 bytes 7001 packet output, 91013 bytes 3 input error, 0 output error
The above information indicates that: this interface has received 7001 incoming packets and 96848 bytes and transmitted out 7001 outgoing packets and 91013 bytes. 3 errors are received and no errors have been made while transmitting packets.
Related Command
show interface
5.22 show frame-relay pvc

To display the FR PVC table, use the command show frame-relay pvc.
5-17
Chapter 5
show frame-relay pvc
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command displays the statistics of the FR PVC status and incoming/outgoing data on this VC.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay pvc
Serial0 Frame Relay DTE statistics: DLCI=100, status=ACTIVE FECNs=0, BECNs=0, RecvFrames=3, RecvOctets=90, SentFrames=0, SentOctets=0
The above information indicates that: this interface works in frame relay DTE mode. DLCI= 100 is up. No forward explicit congestion notification and backward explicit congestion notification received on this DLCI. Three frames with 90 bytes are received. There is no outgoing frame. Their meanings are given in the following table. Table LLC-5-2 Information in frame relay PVC
Field DLCI status FECNs BECNs RecvFrames RecvOctets SentFrames SentOctets Meaning Data link connection identifier DLCI status Number of Forward explicit congestion notifications received Number of Backward explicit congestion notifications received Number of frames received Number of octets received Number of frames sent Number of octets sent
Related Command
frame-relay local-dlci
5.23 show frame-relay route

To display all the configured FR routes along with their status, use the command show frame-relay route. show frame-relay route
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Users can use the command to check if frame relay routes are correctly configured.
5-18
Chapter 5
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay route
Input Intf Serial1 Serial1 Serial1 Serial1 Serial2 Serial2 Serial2 Serial3 Input Dlci 100 101 102 103 200 201 202 203 Output Intf Serial2 Serial2 Serial2 Serial3 Serial1 Serial1 Serial1 Serial1 Output Dlci 200 201 202 203 100 101 102 103 Status active active active inactive active active active inactive
The description of the fields is as follows: Table LLC-5-3 Frame relay routing table description
Field Input Intf Input DlCI Output Intf Output DlCI Status input interface and unit input DLCI number output interface and unit output DLCI number status of the connection Description
Related Command
frame-relay route
5.24 show frame-relay status

To display the FR status on each interface, use the command show frame-relay status. show frame-relay status
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command can output the FR protocol status on each interface, which is helpful for the users to make fault diagnosis.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay status
Serial 0 Current Status: DOWN Serial 1 Current Status: UP
The above information indicates that: the FR interface Serial0 is DOWN and Serial1 is UP. Their meanings are given in the following table.
5-19
Chapter 5
Table LLC-5-4 FR protocol status information on the interface

Field UP DOWN Description Connected with the remote end and the link layer already enabled Link-layer is not enabled yet.
Related Command
show interface
5.25 show frame-relay traffic

To display the packet statistics of the FR Inverse Address Resolution Protocol, use the command, show frame-relay traffic. show frame-relay traffic
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The packets of FR inverse ARP include address resolution request packet and address resolution response packet. According to the output information of this command, the user can diagnose if the inverse address resolution protocol operates normally.
Example
! The following is sample output from the command. Quidway# show frame-relay traffic
ARP request sent 0 ARP request recvd 0 ARP replies sent 0 ARP replies recvd 0
The above information indicates that no address resolution request packet and address resolution response packet are received or sent.
Related Command
frame-relay inverse-arp
5.26 debug frame-relay

To enable the information-debugging of FR packets, use the command debug framerelay. debug frame-relay { all | arp | event | lmi | packet } [ interface type number ]
Syntax Description
all Enable on the FR information-debugging. arp Enable the FR address resolution information-debugging.
5-20
Chapter 5
event Enable the FR event information-debugging. lmi Enable the LMI protocol information-debugging. packet Enable the FR data packet information-debugging. interface type number Enable the FR packet information-debugging of a specified interface.
Command Mode
5-21
Chapter 6
HDLC Commands
Chapter 6 HDLC Commands

HDLC configuration commands include: encapsulation hdlc keepalive debug hdlc
6.1 encapsulation hdlc

To specify the interface link-layer protocol encapsulation as HDLC, use the command encapsulation hdlc. encapsulation hdlc
Default
Default is PPP protocol.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The command will apply HDLC protocol encapsulation on the interface.
Example
! The following example configures HDLC encapsulate on interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation hdlc
Related Command
show interface
6.2 keepalive
To set the keepalive interval, use the command keepalive. Use the no form to disable keepalive. keepalive seconds no keepalive
Syntax Description
seconds keepalive interval value. The interval must be set as a positive integer that is in the range of 0 through 32767. 0 indicates that the keepalive function is disabled.
6-1
Chapter 6
HDLC Commands
Default
10 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Two routers interconnected should have the same keepalive interval value. If they have two values greatly different, the router with the smaller value will send the keepalive frames several times consecutively. After that, if this router still cannot receive the keepalive frame of the opposite router, the protocol will declare down status.
Example
! The following example sets the keepalive interval value on interface Serial0 as 100 seconds. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# keepalive 100
Related Command
show interface
6.3 debug hdlc

To enable the information-debugging of HDLC packets, use the command debug hdlc. debug hdlc { all | event | packet } [ interface type number ]
Syntax Description
all Enable all the HDLC information-debugging. event Enable the HDLC event information-debugging. packet Enable the HDLC data packet information-debugging. interface type number Enable the HDLC packet information-debugging of a specified interface.
Command Mode
6-2
HUAWEI
VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1 04 Network Protocol Configuration (NC)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands...................................................................... 1-1 1.1 IP Address Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 ip address............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 ip address negotiate............................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 hostname................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.4 ip unnumbered ....................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.5 show hostname ...................................................................................................... 1-4 1.1.6 show ip interface .................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2 ARP Configuration Commands......................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.1 arp .......................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2 clear arp-cache....................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.3 show arp................................................................................................................. 1-7 1.2.4 debug arp ............................................................................................................... 1-7 1.3 Proxy ARP Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-7 1.3.1 ip proxy-arp ............................................................................................................ 1-8 1.4 DNS Configuration Commands ........................................................................................ 1-8 1.4.1 host......................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.4.2 show host ............................................................................................................... 1-9 1.5 NAT Configuration Commands......................................................................................... 1-9 1.5.1 nat clear................................................................................................................ 1-10 1.5.2 nat inside interface ............................................................................................... 1-10 1.5.3 nat inside pool ...................................................................................................... 1-11 1.5.4 nat pool................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.5.5 nat server ............................................................................................................. 1-12 1.5.6 nat timeout............................................................................................................ 1-13 1.5.7 show nat ............................................................................................................... 1-14 1.5.8 debug nat ............................................................................................................. 1-14 1.6 DHCP Configuration Commands.................................................................................... 1-15 1.6.1 ip forward-protocol udp ........................................................................................ 1-15 1.6.2 ip helper-address ................................................................................................. 1-15 1.6.3 show ip forward-protocol ...................................................................................... 1-16 1.6.4 show ip helper-address ........................................................................................ 1-16 1.6.5 debug forward-protocol ........................................................................................ 1-17 1.7 VLAN configuration commands ...................................................................................... 1-17 1.7.1 encapsulation dot1q ............................................................................................. 1-17 1.7.2 interface ethernet ................................................................................................. 1-18 1.7.3 show vlan ............................................................................................................. 1-18
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands .............................................................. 2-1 2.1 clear ip counters................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 ifquelen arp ....................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.3 ifquelen interface .............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.4 ifquelen ip.......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.5 ifquelen ipx........................................................................................................................ 2-3 2.6 ip route-cache ................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.7 ip tcp header-compression ............................................................................................... 2-4 2.8 mtu .................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.9 tcp finwait-time .................................................................................................................. 2-6 2.10 tcp synwait-time .............................................................................................................. 2-7 2.11 tcp window-size............................................................................................................... 2-7 2.12 show ip cache ................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.13 show ip interface............................................................................................................. 2-9 2.14 show ip traffic .................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.15 show tcp brief................................................................................................................ 2-10 Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 clear ipx counters.............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 ipx default-route ................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.3 ipx delay............................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.4 ipx encapsulation .............................................................................................................. 3-3 3.5 ipx gns-reply-disable ......................................................................................................... 3-3 3.6 ipx gns-round-robin ........................................................................................................... 3-4 3.7 ipx max-paths.................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.8 ipx max-reserve-paths ...................................................................................................... 3-5 3.9 ipx max-reserve-servers ................................................................................................... 3-6 3.10 ipx network...................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.11 ipx rip-max-packetsize .................................................................................................... 3-8 3.12 ipx rip-multiplier............................................................................................................... 3-8 3.13 ipx rip-update-time .......................................................................................................... 3-9 3.14 ipx route ........................................................................................................................ 3-10 3.15 ipx routing ..................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.16 ipx sap........................................................................................................................... 3-12 3.17 ipx sap-max-packetsize ................................................................................................ 3-13 3.18 ipx sap-multiplier ........................................................................................................... 3-14 3.19 ipx sap-update-time ...................................................................................................... 3-14 3.20 ipx type-20-propagation ................................................................................................ 3-15 3.21 ipx split-horizon ............................................................................................................. 3-16 3.22 ipx touch-off .................................................................................................................. 3-16 3.23 show ipx interface ......................................................................................................... 3-16 3.24 show ipx route............................................................................................................... 3-18 3.25 show ipx servers ........................................................................................................... 3-20
ii
Table of Contents
3.26 show ipx traffic .............................................................................................................. 3-21 Chapter 4 DLSw Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 4-1 4.1 clear dlsw bridge-entry...................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 clear dlsw circuits.............................................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)........................................................ 4-2 4.4 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)........................................................ 4-3 4.5 dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration)................................................. 4-3 4.6 dlsw disable ...................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.7 dlsw local-peer tcp ............................................................................................................ 4-4 4.8 dlsw remote-peer tcp ........................................................................................................ 4-5 4.9 dlsw timer.......................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.10 encapsulation sdlc .......................................................................................................... 4-7 4.11 idle-mark ......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.12 llc2 ack-delay-time .......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.13 llc2 ack-max .................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.14 llc2 local-window ............................................................................................................. 4-9 4.15 llc2 modulus .................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.16 llc2 N2 ........................................................................................................................... 4-10 4.17 llc2 t1-time..................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.18 llc2 tbusy-time ............................................................................................................... 4-11 4.19 llc2 tpf-time.................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.20 llc2 trej-time................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.21 llc2 txq-max................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.22 sdlc address.................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.23 sdlc holdq...................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.24 sdlc k............................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.25 sdlc modulus ................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.26 sdlc n1........................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.27 sdlc n2........................................................................................................................... 4-16 4.28 sdlc partner ................................................................................................................... 4-16 4.29 sdlc poll-pause-timer..................................................................................................... 4-17 4.30 sdlc saps ....................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.31 sdlc simultaneous ......................................................................................................... 4-18 4.32 sdlc T1 .......................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.33 sdlc T2 .......................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.34 sdlc xid .......................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.35 sdlc role......................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.36 sdlc vmac ...................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.37 show dlsw bridge-entry ................................................................................................. 4-21 4.38 show dlsw capabilities .................................................................................................. 4-22 4.39 show dlsw circuits ......................................................................................................... 4-23 4.40 show dlsw peers ........................................................................................................... 4-23
iii
Table of Contents
4.41 show dlsw reachability .................................................................................................. 4-24 4.42 debug dlsw.................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.43 debug sllc...................................................................................................................... 4-25
iv
Chapter 1
IP Address Configuration Commands
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands

1.1 IP Address Configuration Commands
ip address ip address negotiate hostname ip unnumbered show hostname show ip interface
1.1.1 ip address
To set a primary or secondary IP address for an interface, use the ip address command. To remove an IP address or disable IP processing, use the no form of this command. ip address ip-address mask [ secondary ] no ip address [ ip-address ]
Syntax Description
ip-address IP address. net-mask mask for the associated IP subnet. It is all in decimal format divided by dots. If there is no ip-address in the command no ip address, delete all the ip-address of the interface. secondary specifies that the configured address is a secondary IP address. If this keyword is omitted, the configured address is the primary IP address.
Default
No IP address is defined for the interface
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
An interface can have one primary IP address and multiple secondary IP addresses. Packets generated by the software always use the primary IP address. Therefore, all routers and access servers on a segment should share the same primary network number. Hosts can determine subnet masks using the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Mask Request message. Routers respond to this request with an ICMP Mask Reply message.
1-1
Chapter 1
You can disable IP processing on a particular interface by removing its IP address with the no ip address command. If the software detects another host using one of its IP addresses, it will print an error message on the console. The optional keyword secondary allows you to specify an unlimited number of secondary addresses. Secondary addresses are treated like primary addresses, except the system never generates datagrams other than routing updates with secondary source addresses. IP broadcasts and ARP requests are handled properly, as are interface routes in the IP routing table. Normally, an interface has an IP address. In order for one interface of the router to interconnect with multiple nets, an interface can have multiple IP addresses. One of them is the main IP address, and the others are secondary IP addresses. Following is the relationship between the main and secondary IP addresses during their configuration: If the interface already has an IP address when the main IP address is configured, then the existing IP address should be deleted. The first IP address automatically becomes the main IP address according to the time sequence If there is no IP address when the secondary IP address is configured, this secondary IP address automatically become the main IP address automatically. If there is an IP address when the address to be deleted is the current IP address, the first IP address automatically becomes the main IP address according to the time sequence. In addition, all the IP addresses configured at the interfaces in the router can not be located in the same net. If the no ip address command is not followed by ip-address, then all the IP addresses at this interface are all deleted.
Example
! Configure a main IP address 129.102.0.1 for Serial 0, and the secondary IP address is 202.38.160.1. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.255.0 Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0 secondary
Related Command
ip route, show ip interface, show interface
1.1.2 ip address negotiate

To allow IP address negotiated at the interface, use the ip address negotiate command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. ip address negotiate no ip address negotiate
Default
Disabled
1-2
Chapter 1
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
PPP supports IP address negotiation. IP address negotiation at the interface can be set only when PPP is encapsulated at the interface. Normally, it is necessary to configure ip address negotiate command. Only in some special circumstances such as accessing Internet through the ISP, are the IP addresses of the interface that is connected with the ISP allocated by the ISP through negotiation. When IP address negotiate for the interface is configured, it is not necessary to configure the IP address for this interface.
Example
! Allow IP address to be negotiated at Serial 0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address negotiate
1.1.3 hostname
To define host name for the router, use the hostname command. hostname hostname
Syntax Description
hostname in a character, ranging 1 to 20 characters.
Default
The default hostname for the router is Quidway
Command Mode
Example
! Set the hostname as huawei Quidway(config)# hostname huawei
Huawei(config)#
1.1.4 ip unnumbered
To enable IP processing on a serial interface without assigning an explicit IP address to the interface, use the ip unnumbered command. To disable the IP processing on the interface, use the no form of this command. ip unnumbered interface-type interface-number
1-3
Chapter 1
no ip unnumbered
Syntax Description
interface-type address. type of another interface on which the router has an assigned IP
interface-number number of another interface on which the router has an assigned IP address.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Whenever the unnumbered interface generates a packet (for example, for a routing update), it uses the address of the specified interface as the source address of the IP packet. It also uses the address of the specified interface in determining which routing processes are sending updates over the unnumbered interface. Restrictions include the following: 1) Serial interfaces using HDLC, PPP, Balanced (LAPB), and Frame Relay encapsulations, as well as Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) and tunnel interfaces can be unnumbered. It is not possible to use this interface configuration command with X.25 or Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) interfaces. You cannot use the ping command to determine whether the interface is up, because the interface has no address. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) can be used to remotely monitor interface status. You cannot netboot a runnable image over an unnumbered serial interface. You cannot support IP security options on an unnumbered interface.
2) 3) 4)
The interface you specify by the type and number arguments must be enabled (listed as "up" in the show interfaces command display). The interface-type interface-number cannot be another unnumbered interface.
Example
! Allow IP unnumbered from Ethernet 0 encapsulated with PPP. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip unnumbered ethernet 0
Related Command
ip proxy-arp
1.1.5 show hostname

To display the host name, use the show hostname command. show hostname
1-4
Chapter 1
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command shows the routers hostnames.
Example
3640# show hostname 3640
1.1.6 show ip interface

To display the operating status of all the interfaces in effect, use the command show ip interface [ type number ]. show ip interface [ type number ]
Syntax Description
type type of the interface number number of the interface
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Using this command, the operating status of all the interfaces in effect will be displayed.
1.2 ARP Configuration Commands

Static ARP configuration commands include: arp clear arp-cache show arp debug arp packet
1.2.1 arp
To add a permanent entry in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache, use the arp command. To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no form of this command. arp ip-address ethernet-address [ temp ] no arp ip-address
1-5
Chapter 1
Syntax Description
ip-address IP address in four-part dotted-decimal format corresponding to the local data link address. ether-address local data link address (a 48-bit address). Its format is XX-XX-XX-XXXX-XX, where XX is in hex. temp indicates that the map item is temporary, with a valid interval of 20 minutes, otherwise the router is always valid during the working time.
Default
No entries are permanently installed in the ARP cache
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The software uses ARP cache entries to translate 32-bit IP addresses into 48-bit hardware addresses. Because most hosts support dynamic resolution, you generally do not need to specify static ARP cache entries. To remove all nonstatic entries from the ARP cache, use the clear arp-cache command. The static ARP map item is always valid when the router normally works, and the valid interval for the ARP map item is 20 minutes.
Example
! Set the Ethernet MAC address 00-e0-fc-01-00-00 corresponding to the IP address 129.102.0.1 in the LAN, and this cache is temporarily valid. Quidway(config)# arp 129.102.0.1 00-eo-fc-01-00-00 temp
Related Command
clear arp-cache, show arp
1.2.2 clear arp-cache

To delete all dynamic entries from the ARP cache, to clear the fast-switching cache, and to clear the IP route cache, use the clear arp-cache command. clear arp-cache
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some circumstances, it is necessary to clear and update the ARP cache. You can clear them with the clear arp-cache command.
1-6
Chapter 1
Example
! Clear the ARP cache. Quidway# clear arp-cache
Related Command
arp, show arp
1.2.3 show arp

To display the entries in the ARP table, use the show arp command. show arp [ ip-address ]
Command Mode
Example
Quidway# show arp
Protocol Address Inet 129.102.3.55 Inet 129.102.146.20 Inet 129.102.149.23 Hardware Address 00-c0-26-9d-17-dc 00-c0-df-23-20-d9 00-a0-b9-00-4c-b5 Type Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Interface Ethernet0 Ethernet0 Ethernet0
The above information shows that there are three items in the ARP cache. The first item, for example, indicates that: the protocol stack is IP; the IP address is 129.102.3.55; the MAC address is 00-c0-26-9d-17-dc; this item is automatically derived through ARP from Ethernet0.
Related Command
arp, clear arp-cache
1.2.4 debug arp

To enable the arp packets debugging. debug arp
Command Mode
1.3 Proxy ARP Configuration Commands

Proxy ARP configuration commands include: ip proxy-arp
1-7
Chapter 1
1.3.1 ip proxy-arp
To enable proxy ARP on an interface, use the ip proxy-arp command. To disable proxy arp on the interface, use the no form of this command. ip proxy-arp no ip proxy-arp
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is applied on Ethernet interface. As for the hosts in the same hop but on different physical networks, the proxy ARP function hides the fact that the physical network are separated, and makes the user feel like he is on the same and one physical network.
Example
! Enable proxy ARP at Ethernet 0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ip proxy-arp
1.4 DNS Configuration Commands

DNS configuration commands include: host show host
1.4.1 host
To define a static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache, use the host command. To remove the name-to-address mapping, use the no form of this command. host host-name ip-address
Syntax Description
host-name name of the host, a 20-byte character string. ip-address associated IP address.
Default
Disabled
1-8
Chapter 1
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
There are two types of domain name solutions: dynamic domain name resolution and static domain name resolution. The former means that the user manually configures the map to the IP address. The latter means that the domain is resolved through the DNS server. Now the Quidway series of routers supports static domain name resolution only, and can maintain 50 map items at the most.
Example
! Define mapping from Quidway1 to 129.102.0.1. Quidway(config)# host Quidway1 129.102.0.1
Related Command
show host
1.4.2 show host

To display the default domain name, the style of name lookup service, a list of name server hosts, and the cached list of host names and addresses, use the show host command. show host
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
You can make sure if the output to the static domain name table is correct, according to the information output through this command.
Related Command
host
1.5 NAT Configuration Commands

The configuration commands of Network Address Translation (NAT) include: nat clear nat inside interface nat inside pool nat pool nat server nat timeout show nat debug nat
1-9
Chapter 1
1.5.1 nat clear

To clear dynamic Network Address Translation (NAT) translations from the translation table, use the nat clear command. nat clear
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Clear up the mapping tables of address translation in the memory and release all the memory allocated dynamically to the mapping tables.
1.5.2 nat inside interface

To enable Network Address Translation (NAT) translations on the interface, use the nat inside interface command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. nat inside access-list-number interface no nat inside access-list-number interface
Syntax Description
access-list-number standard IP access control list number. Packets with destination addresses that pass the access control list are translated by the interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Translate the source address of the data message that conforms to the address access control list, by configuring the correlation between the address control list and the interface. To translate by selecting one address in the address pool or by using directly the IP address of the interface. You can configure different address translation correlation on one interface.
Example
The host computers of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment are allowed for address translation, selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as the translated address. Suppose ISP is connected by Serial0 port. Quidway(config)# access-list 1 deny any Quidway(config)# access-list 1 permit 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255 ! Add correlation between the address list and the address pool. Quidway(config-if-seral0)# nat inside 1 interface
1-10
Chapter 1
1.5.3 nat inside pool

To enable Network Address Translation (NAT) of the inside destination address, use the nat inside pool command. To remove the dynamic association to a pool, use the no form of this command. nat inside access-list-number pool pool-name no nat inside access-list-number pool pool-name
Syntax Description
access-list-number standard IP access control list number. Packets with destination addresses that pass the access control list are translated using global addresses from the named pool. pool-name name of the pool from which global IP addresses are allocated during dynamic translation.
Default
No inside destination addresses are translated
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command has two forms: dynamic and static address translation. The form with an access control list establishes dynamic translation. Packets from addresses that match the standard access control list are translated by using global addresses allocated from the pool named with the nat pool command.
Example
The host computers of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment are allowed for address translation, selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as the translated address. Suppose Serial0 port is connected to ISP. Quidway(config)# access-list 1 deny any Quidway(config)# access-list 1 permit 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255 ! Configure the address pool Quidway(config)# nat pool 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.12 pool 1 ! Add correlation between the address list and the address pool. Quidway(config-if-serial0)# nat inside 1 pool 1
1.5.4 nat pool

To define a pool of IP addresses for Network Address Translation (NAT), use the nat pool command. To remove one or more addresses from the pool, use the no form of this command. nat pool start-addr end-addr pool-name no nat pool pool-name
1-11
Chapter 1
Syntax Description
start-addr starting IP address that defines the range of addresses in the address pool. end-addr ending IP address that defines the range of addresses in the address pool. pool-nam name of the pool.
Default
No pool of addresses is defined
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
All the addresses in the address pool should be consecutive. For the most, 64 addresses can be defined in each address pool. An address pool cant be deleted, if it is correlated to one access control list and address translation has started.
Example
! Configure one address pool from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.15, with the name pool1. Quidway(config)# nat pool 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.15 pool 1
1.5.5 nat server

To define a inside server associated with a pool of address, use the nat server command. To remove association to a pool, use the no form of this command. nat server global global-addr [ global-port ] inside inside-addr inside-port protocol no nat server { global | inside } address port protocol
Syntax Description
global-addr an IP address provided by a pool of address which can access the outside. global-port a port number which can access the outside. inside-add IP address of the inside server. inside-port port number provided for the inside server, the port numbers commonly used are stood for with key words. For instance: The WWW service port number is 80, which can also be stood for by WWW; The FTP service port number is 21, which can also be stood for by FTP. inside-port is indispensable, which can be 0 or any of the ports. protocol could be TCP, UDP, IP or ICMP.
Command Mode
1-12
Chapter 1
Usage Guideline
By this command, some of the servers, which the internal network can provide for the usage of the outside, can be configured, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, pop3 and DNS. By the relevant no command, the corresponding internal server configuration can be deleted. The interface of the command should be interconnected with ISP and is the exit of the internal network.
Example
! The IP address of the internal WWW server of the specified LAN is 10.110.10.10. The IP address of the internal FTP server is 10.110.10.11. It is hoped that the outside can access WEB through http:// 202.110.10.10:8080 and connect FTP wet site through ftp://202.110.10.10. Suppose Serial0 is connected to ISP. Quidway(config-if-serial0)# nat server global 202.110.10.10 8080 inside 10.110.10.10 tcp www Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# nat server global 202.38.160.101 inside 10.110.10.1 ftp tcp ! Specify one internal host computer 10.110.10.12. Hope that the host computer of the external network can find out that its connected with ping 202.110.10.11 command. Quidway(config)# nat server global 202.110.10.11 inside 10.110.10.12 any
1.5.6 nat timeout

To change the amount of time after which Network Address Translation (NAT) time out, use the nat timeout command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. nat timeout { tcp | udp | icmp seconds } nat timeout default
Syntax Description
seconds number of seconds after which the specified port translation times out.
Default
The timeout value for TCP is 240 seconds. The timeout value for UDP is 40 seconds. The timeout value for ICMP is 20 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command sets up the valid time of address translation connection, different time for different type of protocol. The unit of the time is second.
Example
! Set up the valid connection time of TCP protocol to 240 seconds.
1-13
Chapter 1
Quidway# nat timeout tcp 240
1.5.7 show nat

To display active Network Address Translation (NAT) translations, use the show nat command. show nat
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command shows the users configuration of the address translation. The user can verify if the configuration of the address translation is correct according to the input information of this command.
Example
Quidway# show nat
Nat pool pool1 from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 pool2 from 202.110.100.10 to 202.110.100.12 Nat inside (Interface:Serial0): access-list(1) ---- Nat pool (pool1 ) Nat server: Interface global-address global-port host-address host-port protocol Serial0 202.110.10.100 8080 10.110.10.10 80 (www) 6 (tcp) Serial0 202.110.10.100 2121 10.110.10.10 21 (ftp) 6 (tcp) Serial0 202.110.10.100 23(telnet)10.110.10.12 23(telnet) 6(tcp) Nat timeout: tcp timeout value -------------100 udp timeout value -------------60 icmp timeout value --------------20
The information above shows: Two address pools, pool1 and pool2, are configured, with the addresses ranges from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 and from 202.110.100.10 to 202.110.100.12 respectively. Seria10 is configured with NAT, enabling the addresses in address list 1 to be translated to the addresses in address pool pool1. Serial0 is configured with 3 internal servers. The internal address of the WW server of http://202.110.10.100:8080 is 10.110.10.10; the internal address of FTP server of ftp://202.110.10.100:2121 is 10.110.10.10; the internal address of telnet://202.110.10.100 is 10.110.10.12. Its the valid time of various connections in the last row.
1.5.8 debug nat

Enable the NAT information debugging. debug nat { event | packet }
Syntax Description
event enables the NAT event information debugging. packet enables the NAT data packet information debugging.
1-14
Chapter 1
Command Mode
1.6 DHCP Configuration Commands

The configuration commands of DHCP include: ip forward-protocol udp ip helper-address show ip helper-address show ip forward-protocol debug forward-protocol
1.6.1 ip forward-protocol udp

To specify which protocols and ports the router forwards when forwarding broadcast packets, use the ip forward-protocol udp command. To remove a protocol or port, use the no form of this command. ip forward-protocol udp port no ip forward-protocol udp [ port ]
Syntax Description
port destination port that controls which UDP services are forwarded.
Default
If an IP helper address is defined, UDP forwarding is enabled on default ports. If a helper address is specified and UDP forwarding is enabled, broadcast packets destined to the following port numbers are forwarded by default: Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) (port 69) Domain Naming System (port 53) Time service (port 37) Boot Protocol (BOOTP) client and server datagrams (ports 67 and 68)
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For DHCP, the helper address defines the DHCP server address. After configuring a helper address, the broadcast packets received from the interface will be transmitted to the server. The interface that can configure helper addresses should support broadcast. Each interface can configure at most 20 helper addresses.
1.6.2 ip helper-address
To specify helper address, which forwards User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts, use the ip helper-address command. To disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to specific addresses, use the no form of this command.
1-15
Chapter 1
ip helper-address ip-address no ip helper-address [ ip-address ]
Syntax Description
ip-address the starting ip-address in the address pool.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
For DHCP, the helper address defines the DHCP server address. After configuring a helper address, the broadcast packets received from the interface will be transmitted to the server. The interface that can configure helper addresses should support broadcast. Each interface can configure at most 20 helper addresses.
1.6.3 show ip forward-protocol

To display the status of forwarding User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagrams, use the show ip forward-protocol command. show ip forward-protocol
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The command will display the status of forwarding UDP datagrams.
1.6.4 show ip helper-address

To display the status of helper address on the interface, use the show ip helperaddress command. show ip helper-address
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The command will display the status of helper address on the interface.
1-16
Chapter 1
1.6.5 debug forward-protocol

To enable the forwarding packets debugging, use the debug forward-protocol command. debug forward-protocol
Command Mode
1.7 VLAN configuration commands

VLAN configuration commands include: encapsulation dot1q interface ethernet show vlan
1.7.1 encapsulation dot1q

To specifies the Ethernet sub-interface of VLAN, use the encapsulation dot1q command. To cancel existing designations, use the no form of this command. encapsulation dot1q vlan-id no encap-vlan
vlan-id Identify the ID number of the VLAN to which Ethernet sub-interfacebelongs. The value range is 1~4094
Command Mode
Ethernet sub-interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used on the Ethernet sub-interface. Only after being configured with this command, can the Ethernet sub-interface insert VLAN tag into the Ethernet frame header according to the configured VLAN ID number, and the exchange interface linked with this network interface can properly handle the frame received.
Note: The Ethernet sub-interface is only applied in IPX and VLAN. So, as to a certain Ethernet sub-interface which has not been configured with VLAN ID, it is not permitted to specify its IP address.
1-17
Chapter 1
Example
! The following example specifies that the Ethernet interface Ethernet 0.1 belongs to VLAN 1. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0.1)# encapsulation dot1q 1
Related Command
interface ethernet
1.7.2 interface ethernet

To create an Ethernet sub-interface or enter the already existing Ethernet sub-interface configuration mode, use the interface ethernet command. To delete the specified Ethernet sub-interface, use the no form of this command. interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number no interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number
interface-number Ethernet interface serial number. Ethernet interface serial number. The value range is subinterface-number 0~4294967295. But when the value is 0, it refers to the main interface to which the sub-interface belongs, so actually the Ethernet sub-interface serial number starts from 1.
Default
By default, the Ethernet sub-interface is not created.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The VLAN ID information can only be configured after the Ethernet sub-interface has been created.
Example
! The following example establishes the Ethernet sub-interface and enters its configuration mode. Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0.1 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0.1)#
1.7.3 show vlan

To display the related information such as the IDs of all the configured VLAN and the Ethernet sub-interface where they are located etc., use the show vlan command.
1-18
Chapter 1
show vlan
Command Mode
Privileged mode
Usage Guideline
This command can be used to get the information of all the VLAN configured on the router and the related Ethernet sub-interface.
Example
! The following example shows the related information of all the configured VLAN. Quidway# show vlan
Ethernet0.1 Ethernet0.2 ------------------------------------VLAN 2 VLAN 1
Table NC-1-1 describes the show vlan command parameters. Table NC-1-1 show vlan command parameter description
Domain Name interface VLAN Description The Ethernet sub-interface where the VLAN is located VLAN ID
Related Command
encapsulation dot1q
1-19
Chapter 2
IP Performance Configuration Commands
Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands

IP performance configuration commands include: clear ip counters ifquelen arp ifquelen interface ifquelen ip ifquelen ipx ip route-cache ip tcp header-compression mtu tcp finwait-time tcp synwait-time tcp window-size show ip cache show ip interface show ip traffic show tcp brief
2.1 clear ip counters

To clear the information of IP statistics counters, use the clear ip counters command. clear ip counters
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In some special circumstances, it is necessary to clear the existing IP statistics for new statistics.
Related Command
show ip interface, show ip traffic
2.2 ifquelen arp

To define the length of arp packets queue at the interface, use the ifquelen arp command. To restore the default value, use the no form of the command. ifquelen arp queue-length no ifquelen arp
2-1
Chapter 2
Syntax Description
queue-length Ranging 0 to 1000 bytes.
Default
75 bytes
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Configuring the ARP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernet interface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
Example
! Configure the ARP queue length to be 70. Quidway(config)# ifquelen arp 70
Related Command
show ip interface
2.3 ifquelen interface

To define the length of ARP packets queue, use the command ifquelen interface type number { receive-queue | send-queue } queue-length. To restore its default value, use the no form of the command. ifquelen interface type number { receive-queue | send-queue } queue-length no ifquelen interface
Syntax Description
queue-length ranging 10 to 1000 bytes.
Default
75 bytes
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Configuring the IP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernet interface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.4 ifquelen ip
To define the length of IP packets queue, use the ifquelen ip queue-length command. To restore its default value, use the no form of the command. ifquelen ip queue-length no ifquelen ip
Syntax Description
Default
75 bytes
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Configuring the IP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernet interface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
Example
! Configure the IP queue length to be 70 Quidway(config)# ifquelen ip 70
Related Command
show ip interface
2.5 ifquelen ipx

To define the length of IP packets queue at the interface, use the ifquelen ipx command. To restore its default value, use the no form of the command. ifquelen ipx queue-length no ifquelen ipx
Syntax Description
Default
75 bytes
2-3
Chapter 2
Command Mode
Example
! Configure the IPX queue to 95. Quidway(config)# ifquelen ipx 95
2.6 ip route-cache
To control the use of high-speed switching caches for IP routing, use the ip routecache command. To disable any of these switching modes, use the no form of this command. ip route-cache no ip route-cache
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
These two commands are respectively used to enable and disable fast forwarding of packets received at the interface. Fast forwarding is suitable for high-speed link interfaces (like the Ethernet and frame relay). Due to the low speed of the low-speed link, it is meaningless to use fast forwarding. The Quidway series of routers supports fast forwarding at various high-speed links, including the Ethernet, synchronous PPP, frame relay, and HLDC. Also it supports fast downloading of the firewall. By default, the interface can enable fast forwarding.
Example
! Disable ip route-cache. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# no ip route-cache
2.7 ip tcp header-compression

To enable TCP header compression, use the ip tcp header-compression command. To disable compression, use the no form of this command. ip tcp header-compression no ip tcp header-compression
2-4
Chapter 2
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When running PPP in the lines of low speed WAN, the TCP header accounts for a large proportion in all the transmitting data, so TCP header-compression can be used to improve the efficiency of data transmission. You can compress the headers of your TCP/IP packets in order to reduce the size of your packets. TCP header compression is supported on serial lines using Frame Relay, HDLC or Point-to-Point (PPP) encapsulation. You must enable compression on both ends of a serial connection. RFC 1144 specifies the compression process. Compressing the TCP header can speed up Telnet connections dramatically. In general, TCP header compression is advantageous when your traffic consists of many small packets, not for traffic that consists of large packets. Transaction processing (usually using terminals) tends to use small packets while file transfers use large packets. This feature only compresses the TCP header, so it has no effect on UDP packets or other protocol headers. When compression is enabled, fast switching is disabled. This means that fast interfaces like T1 can overload the router. Consider your network's traffic characteristics before using this command.
Example
! Enable TCP header-compression at the PPP interface Serial0. Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip tcp header-compression
Related Command
encapsulation ppp
2.8 mtu
To set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of IP packets sent on an interface, use the mtu command. To restore the default MTU size, use the no form of this command. mtu size no mtu
Syntax Description
Size the maximum size of the transmission unit. When the encapsulation format for the Ethernet is EthernetII, the mtu at the interface ranges from 46 to 1500 bytes. When the encapsulation format at the Ethernet interface is SNAP, the mtu at the interface ranges from 46 to 1492 bytes; and that at the serial interface ranging 128 to 1500 bytes; the mtu at the BRI interface ranging 128 to 1500 bytes.
2-5
Chapter 2
Default
1500 bytes when the encapsulation format is EthernetII. 1492 bytes when the encapsulation format is SNAP. 1500 bytes for the serial interface; 1500 bytes for the BRI interface.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
If an IP packet exceeds the MTU set for the interface, the software will fragment it. All devices on a physical medium must have the same protocol MTU in order to operate.
2.9 tcp finwait-time

To set the TCP finwait timer, use the tcp finwait-time command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. tcp finwait-time seconds no tcp finwait-time
Syntax Description
seconds Value of the TCP finwait timer with the second as the unit, ranging 76 to 3600 seconds.
Default
The default time is 675 seconds
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Start the finwait timer when the connection status changes from FIN_WATI_1 to FIN_WAIT_2. If no FIN message is received before the finwait timer is timeout, the TCP connection will be terminated. This parameter should be configured under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
Example
! Set the value of the TCP finwait timer to be 675 seconds. Quidway(config)# tcp finwait-time 675
2-6
Chapter 2
Related Command
tcp synwait-time, tcp window-size
2.10 tcp synwait-time

To set a period of time the software waits while attempting to establish a TCP connection before it times out, use the tcp synwait-time command. To restore the default time, use the no form of this command. tcp synwait-time seconds no tcp synwait-time
Syntax Description
seconds synwait-time a time value for the TCP synwait timer with the second as its unit, ranging 2 to 600 seconds.
Default
The default time is 75 seconds
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the synchronous packet is transmitted, the TCP starts the synwait timer. If no acknowledgment packet is received before the synwait is timeout, then the TCP connection will be terminated. This parameter should be configured under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
Example
! Configure the TCP synwait timer to 75 seconds. Quidway(config)# tcp synwait-time 75
Related Command
tcp finwait-time, tcp window-size
2.11 tcp window-size

To define the tranceiving buffer window size of the connection-oriented socket, use the tcp window-size command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. tcp window-size window-size no tcp window-size
2-7
Chapter 2
Syntax Description
window-size window size of the TCP connection-oriented socket in Kbytes, ranging 1 to 32 Kbytes.
Default
The default size is 4 Kbytes
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This parameter should better be set under the guidance of the technical support engineer.
Example
! Set the window size of the TCP connection-oriented socket to be 4 Kbytes. Quidway(config)# tcp window-size 4
Related Command
tcp finwait-time, tcp synwait-time
2.12 show ip cache

To display the routing table cache used to fast switch IP traffic, use the show ip route-cache command. show ip route-cache
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is for showing the used routes and helping the user diagnose for faults.
Example
Quidway# show ip route-cache
Route to destination 129.102.100.141:
Destination NetMask 129.102.100.141 255.255.255.255
Type direct
Interface Ethernet0
GateWay
The above information shows that the route recently used is one reaching 129.102.100.141. This is a direct route, whose output interface is Ethernet0.
Related Command
ip route
2-8
Chapter 2
2.13 show ip interface

To display the usability status of interfaces configured for IP, use the show ip interface command. show ip interface [ type number ]
Syntax Description
type the interface type. number the interface number.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command outputs IP relevant information at the interface, and this is helpful for fault diagnosis
Example
Quidway# show ip interface serial 0
Interface is Serial0, Index is 2 ifFlags=8004 <NBMA,MULTICAST> protocol is x25 dte ietf, MTU is 1500, speed is 64000 bps input queue is 0/75/0 (current/max/drops) output queue is 0/75/0 (current/max/drops) 0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 multicasts 0 input packets dropped, 0 no protocols, 0 input errors 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 multicasts, 0 output errors
The above information shows; Serial0 has an index of 2; the interface type is NBMA, supporting multicast; the protocol encapsulated at this interface is X.25; the mtu is 1500 bytes with a transmission speed of 64kbps. This also reflects the maximum lengths of received and transmitted queues, number of packets in the current queue and number of packets dropped due to a full queue, number of packets received and transmitted, number of multicast packets received and transmitted, number of unidentifiable packets, etc.
Related Command
show interface
2.14 show ip traffic

To display statistics about IP traffic, use the show ip traffic command. show ip traffic
Command Mode
2-9
Chapter 2
Usage Guideline
This command shows the statistics of received and transmitted IP packets, assembled and fragmented packets, which are helpful for fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show ip traffic
IP statistics: Rcvd: 259 total, 250 local destination 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors 0 unknown protocol, 0 bad options Frags: 0 fragment rcvd, 0 fragment dropped 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts 0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment, 0 fragment sent Sent: 27 generated, 9 forwarded, 0 raw ip packets 0 dropped, 0 no route, 0 Compress fails ICMP statistics: Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 14 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 14 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter problem, 0 timestamp, 0 info reply
The above information shows: IP statistics; Received: 259 messages received, 250 of which are transmitted to the upper-layer protocol; no packet format error; no packet check error; no unknown protocol; no packet option error. Fragments: no fragments received or dropped; the number of fragments successfully reassembled is 0, and no fragment re-assembly timeout; the number of packets successfully fragmented is 0, and number of packets that can not be fragmented is 0; the number of fragments generated and forwarded is 0. Sent: 27 packets generated, and 9 packets forwarded; 0 Raw IP packet generated; 0 packet dropped; 0 packet with no route; 0 packet fails to be compressed. ICMP statistics: Received: 0 packet with format error received, 0 packet with checksum error, 0 redirect packet, 0 unreachable packet, 14 echo request packets, 0 mask request packet, 0 mask reply packet, 0 quench packet, 0 packet with parameter problem, 0 timestamp request packet, and 0 information request packets. Sent: 0 redirect packet forwarded, 0 unreachable packet, 0 echo request packet, 14 packets, 0 mask request packet, 0 mask reply packet, 0 quench packet, 0 packet with parameter problem, 0 timestamp request packet, and 0 information reply packet.
Related Command
show interface, show ip interface, clear ip counters
2.15 show tcp brief

To display TCP connection status, use the show tcp brief command. show tcp brief
2-10
Chapter 2
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command shows all the TCP connection states so that the user can monitor the TCP connections at any time.
Example
Quidway# show tcp brief
LocalAddress LocalPort ForeignAddress 129.102.100.142 23 129.102.001.092 000.000.000.000 23 000.000.000.000 ForeignPort State 1038 ESTABLISHED 0 LISTEN
The above information shows: a TCP connection has been set up, and the local UP address of the TCP is 129.102.100.142; the local port number is 23; the foreign IP address is 129.102.1.92; the remote port number is 1038. In addition, there is a server especially responsible for monitoring port 23.
Related Command
show client
2-11
Chapter 3
IPX Configuration Commands
Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands

IPX configuration commands include: clear ipx counters ipx default-route ipx delay ipx down ipx encapsulation ipx gns-reply-disable ipx gns-round-robin ipx max-paths ipx max-reserve-paths ipx max-reserve-servers ipx network ipx rip-max-packetsize ipx rip-multiplier ipx rip-update-time ipx route ipx routing ipx sap ipx sap-max-packetsize ipx sap-multiplier ipx sap-update-time ipx split-horizon ipx type-20-propagation ipx touch-off show ipx interface show ipx route show ipx servers show ipx traffic
3.1 clear ipx counters

To reset all ipx counters, use the clear ipx counters command. clear ipx counters
Command Mode
Example
! Clear all the IPX counters. Quidway# clear ipx counters
Related Command
show ipx traffic
3-1
Chapter 3
3.2 ipx default-route

To forward to the default network all packets for which a route to the destination network is unknown, use the ipx default-route command. To disable the use of the default network, use the no form of this command. ipx default-route no ipx default-route
Default
Enabled: All packets for which a route to the destination is unknown are forwarded to the default network, which is 2 (0xFFFFFFFE).
Command Mode
Example
! Disable the default route. Quidway(config)# no ipx default-route
3.3 ipx delay

To set the tick count, use the ipx delay command. To reset the default increment in the delay field, use the no form of this command. ipx delay ticks no ipx delay
Syntax Description
ticks number of IBM clock ticks of delay to use. One clock tick is 1/18 of a second (approximately 55 ms).
Default
1 tick for the ipx delay for the Ethernet, 30 ticks for the serial interface, and 6 ticks for the other WAN interfaces.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage Guideline
The ipx delay command is used as a basis for judging the best route. In privileged user mode, the show ipx interface command can be used to show the values configured through ipx delay command.
3-2
Chapter 3
Example
! Set the delay at Ethernet0 to be 10 ticks. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx delay 10
Related Command
ipx max-paths
3.4 ipx encapsulation

To define the encapsulation frame type at the Ethernet, use the ipx encapsulation command. To restore the default encapsulation frame type, use the no form of this command. no ipx encapsulation frame_type no ipx encapsulation
Syntax Description
frame_type encapsulation frame type at the Ethernet, which can be any of the Ethernet-II(ARPA), Ethernet-SNAP(SNAP), IEEE8.2.2(sap) and IEEE802.3(novellether).
Default
Novell-ether
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The value set through this command is used to process the received packet at the Ethernet interface. If the packet type is different from the set encapsulation frame type, then the packet will be lost. The packet sent from the Ethernet interface is forwarded to the physical layer after it has been encapsulated in the specified frame type. The show ipx route command can be executed to show the encapsulation frame type that has been configured through ipx encapsulation.
Example
! Set the encapsulation frame type at Ethernet0 to be SAP Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx encapsulation sap
3.5 ipx gns-reply-disable

To disable the sending of replies to IPX Get Nearest Server (GNS) queries, use the ipx gns-reply-disable command. To disable the function (Replies are sent to IPX GNS queries), use the no form of this command.
3-3
Chapter 3
ipx gns-reply-disable no ipx gns-reply-disable
Default
Replies are sent to IPX GNS queries
Command Mode
Example
! Disable reply to IPX GNS request at Ethernet0. Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx gns-reply-disable
3.6 ipx gns-round-robin

To rotate using a round-robin selection method through a set of eligible servers when responding to Get Nearest Server (GNS) requests, use the ipx gns-round-robin command. To use the most recently learned server, use the no form of this command. ipx gns-round-robin no ipx gns-round-robin
Default
The most recently learned eligible server is used
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
In the normal server selection process, requests for service are responded to with the most recently learned, closest server. If you enable the round-robin method, the software maintains a list of the nearest servers eligible to provide specific services. It uses this list when responding to GNS requests. Responses to requests are distributed in a round-robin fashion across all active IPX interfaces on the router.
Example
! Enable ipx gns-round-robin. Quidway(config)# ipx gns-round-robin
3.7 ipx max-paths

To set the maximum number of equal-cost paths the software uses when forwarding packets, use the ipx maximum-paths command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command.
3-4
Chapter 3
ipx max-paths paths no ipx max-paths
Syntax Description
paths maximum number of equal-cost paths which the software will use, ranging 1 to 64.
Default
The maximum number of equal-cost paths is 1 path
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The ipx maximum-paths command increases throughput by allowing the software to choose among several equal-cost, parallel paths. (Note that when paths have different costs, the software chooses lower-cost routes in preference to higher-cost routes.) When per-host load sharing is disabled, IPX performs load sharing on a packet-bypacket basis in round-robin fashion, regardless of whether you are using fast switching or process switching. That is, the first packet is sent along the first path, the second packet along the second path, and so on. When the final path is reached, the next packet is sent to the first path, the next to the second path, and so on. Limiting the number of equal-cost paths can save memory on routers with limited memory or with very large configurations. Additionally, in networks with a large number of multiple paths and systems with limited ability to cache out-of-sequence packets, performance might suffer when traffic is split between many paths.
Example
! Set the maximum IPX paths to be 5 paths. Quidway(config)# ipx max-paths 5
Related Command
ipx max-reserve-paths
3.8 ipx max-reserve-paths

To set the length of routing reserve queue, use the no ipx max-reserve-paths command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. ipx max-reserve-paths paths no ipx max-reserve-paths
Syntax Description
paths the length of routing reserve queue, ranging 1 to 255.
3-5
Chapter 3
Default
Default length of the routing reserve queue is 4.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the length of the max reserve queue is 1, the system reserves one route only for a destination. When this unique route is faulty and the system has deleted it, there no route available to this destination while it is searching for routes, and this will lead to serious loss of packets. When the length of the reserve queue is greater than 1 and the first route is deleted, the system can replace it with the next route so as to avoid serious loss of packets. Increasing the length of the reserve queue will result in more memory of the system being used by the IPX module.
Example
! Set the length of the max routing reserve queue to be 10. Quidway(config)# ipx max-reserve-paths 10
Related Command
ipx max-paths
3.9 ipx max-reserve-servers

To set the length of server information reserve queue, use the no ipx max-reserveservers command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. ipx max-reserve-servers length no ipx max-reserve-servers
Syntax Description
length length of the server information reserve queue, ranging 1 to 64.
Default
Default length of the server information reserve queue is 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the length of the max reserve queue is 1, the system reserves one route only for a destination. When this unique route is faulty and the system has deleted it, there no route available to this destination while it is searching for routes, and this will lead to serious loss of packets. When the length of the reserve queue is greater than 1 and the
3-6
Chapter 3
first route is deleted, the system can replace it with the next route so as to avoid serious loss of packets. Increasing the length of the reserve queue will result in more memory of the system being used by the IPX module.
Example
! Set the length of the max server information reserve queue to be 10. Quidway(config)# ipx max-reserve-servers 10
3.10 ipx network

To enable IPX routing on a particular interface, use the ipx network command. To disable IPX routing, use the no form of this command. ipx network network no ipx network
Syntax Description
network IPX network number. This is an eight-digit hexadecimal number that uniquely identifies a network cable segment ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. You do not need to specify leading zeros in the network number. For example, for the network number 000000AA you can enter AA.
Default
IPX routing is disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
To activate the IPX module on an interface, it is necessary to use the ipx network command. If it is necessary to change the encapsulation type of the IPX frame, you can use the ipx encapsulation command.
Example
! Activate the IPX route at Ethernet0. Quidway(config)# ipx routing Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface ethernet 0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx network 2 ! Activate the IPX route at Ethernet0, and set the encapsulation form of IPX frame to Ethernet_SNAP. Quidway(config)# ipx routing Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface ethernet 0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx network 2
3-7
Chapter 3
Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx encapsulation snap
Related Command
ipx encapsulation, ipx routing
3.11 ipx rip-max-packetsize

To configure the maximum packet size of RIP updates sent out the interface, use the ipx rip-max-packetsize command mode. To restore the default packet size, use the no form of this command. ipx rip-max-packetsize bytes no ipx rip-max-packetsize
Syntax Description
bytes maximum packet size in bytes, ranging 432 to 1500 bytes.
Default
The default packet size is 432 bytes, which allows for 50 routes at 8 bytes each.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The maximum size includes the sizes of IPX packet header and RIP packet header.
Example
! Set the maximum RIP packet size at Ethernet0 to be 832 bytes (that is, it can contain 100 routing messages). Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx rip-max-packetsize 832
3.12 ipx rip-multiplier

To configure the cycle in which a network's RIP entry ages out, use the ipx ripmultiplier command. To restore the default cycle, use the no form of this command. ipx rip-multiplier multiplier no ipx rip-multiplier
Syntax Description
multiplier multiplier used to calculate the cycle at which to age out RIP routing table entries. The value you specify is multiplied by the RIP update cycle to determine the aging-out cycle. By default, it is three times the RIP update cycle, ranging 1 to 1000.
3-8
Chapter 3
Default
Three times the RIP update cycle
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
All routers in the same IPX network should use the same RIP aging cycle.
Related Command
ipx rip-update-time
3.13 ipx rip-update-time

To set intervals for IPX RIP to control how long it will be waiting to receive the next RIP update packets, use the ipx rip-update-time command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. ipx rip-update-time seconds no ipx rip-update-time
Syntax Description
seconds RIP update time in seconds, ranging 10 to 60000 seconds.
Default
60 seconds
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When the router is started or shut down, it is necessary to exchange routing information with other routers through propagation. When it is running, it needs to propagate cyclically to exchange routing information with the other routers. The ipx rip-updatetime command is used to set the time interval between two rounds of routing information propagation. This interval is 60 seconds by default. In the same network segment, this interval should be the same.
Example
! Set the IPX RIP update packet interval to be 40 seconds. Quidway(config)# ipx rip-update-time 40
3-9
Chapter 3
Related Command
show ipx interface
3.14 ipx route

1) To add a static route summary to the routing table, use the ipx route static command. To remove a static route from the routing table, use the no form of this command.
ipx route network network.node ticks hops static [ preference value ] no ipx route network [ network.node ] static [ preference value ] 2) To add a default route to the routing table, use the ipx route default command. To remove a default route from the routing table, use the no form of this command.
ipx route default network.node [ preference value ] no ipx route default network.node [ preference value ]
Syntax Description
network IPX network number, which is composed of 8 hex digits. It is a unique id in the hop, ranging 1~FFFFFFFD. While inputting the number, you can omit the leading zeros. As for 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA. network.node IPX address of the next router to reach a specified hop. Network is a number composed of 8 hex digits. It is unique id for the hop, ranging 1~FFFFFFFD. When it is input, its leading zeros can be omitted. As for 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA. node is used to identify a node in the network, with a length of 48 bits. When it is input, it is composed of three groups of 4-digit numbers in hex separated by dots (xxxx.xxxx.xxxx). ticks time needed for reaching the destination hop, its unit being the tick (1 tick=1/18'). hops number of routers to go through before reaching the destination hop. default creates a static entry for the "default route. All the packets that cannot find destinations are sent here. static remove information of the "static route. preference routing preference; value preference value, ranging 0 to 255.
Default
No static routes are predefined
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The routing protocol can dynamically update the routing table, but it also can add static routes to the routing table, and expressly give an instruction of how to reach a
3-10
Chapter 3
destination. The preference for the static route is 10, and that for a dynamic route is 60. The smaller the value, the higher the preference. Note that when a static route is set up and once an error occurs to any segment of this route, communication will be interrupted or packets are transmitted to a non-existing destination. A default route can be configured in a router. When its destination network is configured as FFFFFFFE, all the packets that fail to find routes will be forwarded along this route.
Example
! Reach the hop 5a through the router with the address 1000.0.0c91.f61f Quidway(config)# ipx routing Quidway(config)# ipx route 5a 1000.0.0c91.f61f 10 2 ! Set a default routing which next hop address is 3.4a.60.7. Quidway(config)# ipx routing Quidway(config)# ipx route default 3.4a.60.7 10 2 ! Set a default routing which next hop address is 3.4a.60.7, with a preference of 20. Quidway(config)# ipx routing Quidway(config)# ipx route default 3.4a.60.7 10 2 preference 20
Related Command
ipx default-route, show ipx route
3.15 ipx routing

To enable IPX, use the ipx routing command. To disable IPX, use the no form of this command. ipx routing [ node ] no ipx routing
Syntax Description
node nodes number of the router. This is a 48-bit value represented by a dotted triplet of four-digit hexadecimal numbers. It is not a broadcasting address. If you omit the node argument, the software will use the hardware MAC address currently assigned to it as its node address.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
3-11
Chapter 3
Usage Guideline
The ipx routing command enables IPX Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) services. If you omit the node value, when MAC addresses change, the node values of routers will automatically change. In this way, during the period when MAC addresses change and clients and servers get new addresses, the communication may break off.
Example
! Enable the IPX routing in the router. Quidway(config)# ipx routing ! Enable the IPX routing in the router, the nodes number is 1.1.1. Quidway(config)# ipx routing 1.1.1
Related Command
ipx network
3.16 ipx sap

To add a static Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) entry to the SAP table, use the ipx sap command. To remove static SAP entries, use the no form of this command. ipx sap service-type name network.node socket hopcount preference preference no ipx sap service-type [ name ] [ network.node ]
Syntax Description
service-type SAP service-type number. See the access-list (SAP filtering) command earlier in this chapter for a table of some IPX SAP services. Name name of the server that provides the service. network.node network number and node address of the server. As a unique id for a hop, the network number is composed of 8 hex digits, ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. While inputting it, the leading zeros can be omitted. As for 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA. The node value is used to identify a node in the network, with a length of 48 bits. When it is actually input, it is composed of 3 groups of 4-digit number in hex separated by dot (xxxx.xxxx.xxxx). socket socket number for this service. hopcount count of hops to go through before reaching the server. preference the preference of service information. preference the value of the preference of service information, ranging 0 to 255.
Default
Disabled
3-12
Chapter 3
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The ipx sap command allows you to add a static entry into the SAP table. Each entry has a SAP service associated with it. By default the preference of the static SAP entry is 10 and the preference of the dynamic one is 60. The smaller the value, the higher the preference. The router will not announce a static SAP entry unless it has a route to that network.
Example
! Add a piece of service information of type 4 at 1000.0.0c91.f61f. Quidway(config)# ipx sap 4 server1 1000.0.0c91.f61f 451 2 ! Add a piece of service information of type 4 at 1000.0.0c91.f61f and with a preference of 40 Quidway(config)# ipx sap 4 server1 1000.0.0c91.f61f 451 2 preference 40
Related Command
show ipx servers
3.17 ipx sap-max-packetsize

To configure the maximum packet size of Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) updates sent out the interface, use the ipx sap-max-packetsize command. To restore the default packet size, use the no form of this command. ipx sap-max-packetsize bytes no ipx sap-max-packetsize
Syntax Description
bytes Maximum packet size in bytes, ranging 480 to 1500 bytes.
Default
The default is 480 bytes, which allows for 7 servers (64 bytes each).
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The maximum size includes the sizes of the IPX packet header and SAP header.
3-13
Chapter 3
Example
! Set the maximum SAP packet size to be 672 bytes (which can contain 10 pieces of service information) at Ethernet0 Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx sap-max-packetsize 672
3.18 ipx sap-multiplier

To configure the interval at which a network or server's Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) entry ages out, use the ipx sap-multiplier command. To restore the default interval, use the no form of this command. ipx sap-multiplier multiplier no ipx sap-multiplier
Syntax Description
multiplier multiplier used to calculate the cycle at which to age out SAP routing table entries. The value you specify is multiplied by the SAP update cycle to determine the aging-out cycle. By default, it is three times the update cycle.
Default
The default is three times the SAP update cycle.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
All routers in the same network should use the same multiplier value.
Example
!If the SAP update interval is 2 minutes, then the SAP aging multiplier is 10 minutes after the following command is executed. Quidway(config)# ipx sap-multiplier 5
Related Command
ipx sap-update-time
3.19 ipx sap-update-time

To set intervals for IPX SAP to control how long it will be waiting to receive the next SAP update packets, use the ipx sap-update-time command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command. ipx sap-update-time seconds no ipx sap-update-time
3-14
Chapter 3
Syntax Description
seconds are used to calculate the SAP update time, ranging 60 to 60000 seconds.
Default
60 seconds
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When a router is started or shut down, it needs to exchange information with other routers through propagation. When it is running, it needs to propagate outward cyclically, exchanging information with other servers. The ipx sap-update-time command is used to set the time interval between two rounds of service information propagation. This interval is 60 seconds by default. In the same network segment, this interval should be of the same value.
Example
! Set the SAP update cycle to be 120 seconds. Quidway(config)# ipx sap-update-time 120
Related Command
show ipx interface
3.20 ipx type-20-propagation

To forward IPX type 20 propagation packet broadcasts to other network segments, use the ipx type-20-propagation command. To disable the forwarding of type 20 broadcasts on an interface, use the no form of this command. ipx type-20-propagation no ipx type-20-propagation
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Routers normally block all broadcast requests. To allow input and output of type 20 propagation packets on an interface, use the ipx type-20-propagation command.
3-15
Chapter 3
3.21 ipx split-horizon

To enable split-horizon, use the ipx split-horizon command. To disable the function, use the no form of this command. ipx split-horizon no ipx split-horizon
Default
Enable split-horizon.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The split-horizon arithmetic can prevent route loop. Split-horizon means that an interface will not send out routes that it receives. But in some unusual conditions, split-horizon should be disabled, that is, to achieve the correct transmission by sacrificing efficiency. It will be better not to use the configuration of disabling RIP splithorizon without thinking. Disabling split-horizon will have no effect on point-to-point links.
3.22 ipx touch-off

To enable triggered RIP updates sent on an interface, use the ipx rouch-off command. To disable the function, use the no form of this command. ipx touch-off no ipx touch-off
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
IPXs RIP and SAP will send update broadcast packets cyclically. If the user does not want the router to keep on sending such packets, he can enable the ipx touch-off function at the interface. In this way, update packets will be sent only in the case of change in the routing or service information.
3.23 show ipx interface

To display the status of the IPX interfaces configured and the parameters configured on each interface, use the show ipx interface command.
3-16
Chapter 3
show ipx interface [ type number ]
Syntax Description
type interface type. number interface number.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The information output through this command is helpful for the user to determine if the IPX configuration is correct and to perform IPX fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show ipx interface serial 0
Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is up IPX address is 2.00E0.FC01.0000 [up] line-up Delay of this IPX network in ticks is 1 IPX type 20 propagation packet forwarding is enabled SAP GNS processing enabled SAP GNS round robin processing disabled The maximum number of services reserved is 4 IPX RIP update interval is 60 seconds aging multiples is 3 IPX SAP update interval is 60 seconds aging multiples is 3 RIP packet maximum size is 432 bytes SAP packet maximum size is 480 bytes RIP packets received 0 RIP packets sent 1 SAP packets received 0 SAP packets sent 0 0 bytes received, 0 bytes sent
3-17
Chapter 3
Table NC-3-1 show ipx interface command and meanings of its fields
Name of field Ethernet0 is ... protocol is ... IPX protocol processing disabled IPX address is ... [up]line up Delay of this IPX network, in ticks is ... IPX type 20 propagation packet forwarding ... SAP GNS processing ... SAP GNS round robin processing ... The maximum number of services reserved is ... IPX RIP update interval is ... seconds aging multiplies is ... IPX SAP update interval is... seconds, aging multiplies is ... RIP packet maximum size is ... bytes SAP packet maximum size is ... bytes RIP packets received ... RIP packets sent ... SAP packets received ... SAP packets sent ... ... bytes received ... bytes sent Meaning Seen from the physical layer, if the current interface is up, down, or administratively down. If the bottom-layer is up or down. If the IPX module is activated at the current interface The IPX network number and node value for the current interface. For the detail of the network number and node value, please consult the ipx network and ipx routing commands. If the current interface is up, available or not yet activated. Delay of the current interface. Its value is configured through the ipx delay command. Indicating if IPX type 20 propagation packet forwarding is enabled or disabled. The relevant commands include ipx type-20-propagation. SAP GNS request is being processed at the current interface. The relevant commands include ipx gns-reply-disable. If reply to the SAP GNS request is based on round robin or the nearest service information. The relevant commands include ipx gns-round-robin. Maximum number of services of the same type reserved. The relevant commands include ipx max-reserve-servers. RIP update interval and aging multiplier. The commands relevant with it include ipx rip-update-timeipx rip-multiplier. SAP update interval and aging multiplier. The commands relevant with it include ipx sap-update-time and ipx sap-multiplier. RIP packet maximum size at the current interface. The command relevant with it is ipx rip-max-packetsize. SAP packet maximum size at the current interface. The command relevant with it is ipx sap-max-packetsize. RIP packets received at the current interface RIP packets sent at the current interface SAP packets received at the current interface SAP packets sent at the current interface Total bytes received at the current interface Total bytes sent at the current interface
Related Command
ipx routing, ipx network, ipx down, ipx delay, ipx type-20-propagation, ipx gnsreply-disable, ipx gns-round-robin, ipx max-reserve-servers, ipx rip-update-time, ipx rip-multiplier, ipx sap-update-time, ipx sap-multiplier, ipx rip-max-packetsize, ipx sap-max-packetsize
3.24 show ipx route

To display the contents of the IPX routing table, use the show ipx route command. show ipx route [network | static | default ] [ detailed ]
Syntax Description
network Number of the network whose routing table entry you want to display. it is a unique id for a hop, ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. When inputting this number, the leading number can be omitted. To enter 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA. static indicating all the static routes.
3-18
Chapter 3
default displays the default route. This is equivalent to specifying a value of FFFFFFFE for the argument network. detailed displays detailed route information.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The information output through this command is helpful for IPX RIP fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show ipx route
Codes: C - Direct connected network, S - Static, F - Float s - seconds, u - uses 5 Total IPX routes. Up to 1 parallel paths, 4 reserved paths and 16 hops allowed. Current default route is: S FFFFFFFE [010/02/010] via 2.0A03.0C50.0003, Ethernet0 C 2 (NOVELL-ETHER), Ethernet0 C 1000 (PPP), Serial0 S 100 [010/02/010] via 1000.0B00.CD00.0000, Serial0 F 10 [060/02/010] via 2.0A03.0C50.0003, 10s, Ethernet0
Table NC-3-2 show ipx route command and meanings of its fields
Name of field Codes C S F 5 Total IPX routes. Up to 1 paths 4 reserved paths Current default route is: No default route known. Default route handling is disabled. Net 1 [010/02/010] Meaning Specified sources of routes Directly connected network number Static routes defined through ipx route command Floating (dynamic) routes known through the RIP update packet Total routes in the routing table Maximum paths (routes), which are re-defined through the ipx max-paths command. Length of the max routing information queue; which can be redefined via the ipx max-reserve-paths command. The current default route No default route is known yet Default route handling is not supported. It can be re-defined through ipx default-route. The destination network to which a route points preference/hop/delay. The smaller the preference, the higher the preference of the route. The unit for delay is the tick (1 tick=1/18 second), and a hop indicates the number of routers to go through before reaching the destination. IPX address of the next hop Aging time, with the second as its unit. Times when this route is used. Each time this route is used, 1 is added to the counter.
via network.node 10s u
Related Command
ipx max-paths, ipx max-reserve-paths, ipx route
3-19
Chapter 3
3.25 show ipx servers

To list the IPX servers discovered through Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) advertisements, use the show ipx servers command. show ipx servers [ type service-type | name name | network network | socket socket | sorted { net | type } ] [ detailed ]
Syntax Description
type displays the IPX servers numerically by SAP service type. service-type type of service. name displays the IPX servers alphabetically by server name name name of server. network displays the IPX servers in the specified hop. network the number of the hop where the server to be shown by the user is located. socket service information whose socket is the same as the specified socket. socket sorted displays the IPX service information sorted by type. net classified by the net number. type classified by the service type. detailed details of service information listed.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This information output through this command is helpful for IPX SAP fault diagnosis by the user.
Example
Quidway# show ipx servers
Codes: S - Static, F - Float, s - seconds 3 Total IPX Servers. 4 reserved servers allowed Table ordering is based on routing and server info Type Name Net Address Port Pre/Route Hops If F 4 SERVER1 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:0451 010/2/01 1 Ethernet0 P 26B BJTREE 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:0005 060/2/01 1 Ethernet0 P 278 BJTREE 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:4006 060/2/01 1 Ethernet0
3-20
Chapter 3
Table NC-3-3 show ipx servers command and meaning of the fields of the command
Name of field Codes S F Type Name Net Address Port Pre Pre/Route Hops If s * conn Full name via Meaning Specified sources of service information Static service information defined through the ipx sap command Dynamic service information known from the SAP update packet Sources and service types of service information Server name Network number of the hop where the server is located Node value for the server Socket Preference: the smaller the value, the higher the preference Delay/hop (from the routing information table) Hop (from SAP) Interfaces to go through before reaching the hop where the router is located Aging multiplier for service information Indicating that the static service information has turned invalid Indicating the delay/hop for static service information Indicating that what are to be shown are full service information names Indicating that what are to be shown are interfaces for receiving such service information
Related Command
ipx max-reserve-servers, ipx sap
3.26 show ipx traffic

To display information about the number and type of IPX packets sent and received, use the show ipx traffic command. show ipx traffic
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The information output through this command is helpful for the user to make IPX traffic statistics and fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show ipx traffic
Recv: 0 total, 0 droped 0 checksum errors, 0 bad hop count 0 discarded(hop=16), 0 encapsulation failed 0 packets pitched, 0 local destination 0 broadcast, 0 forward, 0 echo Sent: 0 total, 0 broadcast 0 forwarded, 0 echo Type 20: 0 received, 0 matched, 0 discarded (tc>=8) 0 sent, 0 successfully sent, 0 encapsulation failed RIP: 0 RIP requests, 0 RIP replies, 1 RIP requests sent 0 RIP advertisements received, 0 sent 1 routes
3-21

SAP:
Chapter 3
0 SAP get nearest requests, 0 SAP get nearest replies 0 SAP requests, 0 SAP replies, 1 SAP requests sent 0 SAP advertisements received, 0 sent 1 servers Forward: 0 need forwarding, 0 success 0 no route, 0 encapsulation failed Echo: 0 requests received, 0 replies sent 0 requests sent, 0 replies received 0 no route Total: 412 bytes received, 576 bytes sent
Table NC-3-4 Meanings of the fields in show ipx traffic

Name of field Recv: 0 total 0 drop 0 checksum errors 0 bad hop count 0 discarded(hop=16) 0 encapsulation failed 0 packets patched 0 local destination 0 broadcast 0 forward 0 echo Sent: 0 total 0 broadcast 0 forward 0 echo Type 20: 0 received 0 matched 0 discarded (tc>=8) 0 sent 0 successfully sent 0 encapsulation failed RIP: 0 RIP requests 0 RIP replies 1 RIP requests sent 0 RIP advertisements received 0 sent 1 routes SAP: 0 SAP get nearest requests 0 SAP get nearest replies 0 SAP requests 0 SAP replies 1 SAP requests sent 0 SAP advertisements received 0 sent 1 servers Forward: 0 need forwarding 0 success 0 no route 0 encapsulation failed Echo: Meaning Count of received packets Total packets received Total packets dropped when the router is too busy Total packets dropped due to checksum errors Total packets whose hop values are over 16 Total packets whose hop values=16 Total packets where encapsulation failed Number of packets patched Number of packets whose destination is local Number of received broadcast packets Number of packets to be forwarded Number of received echo packets Total packets sent from the router, including those packets that are to be forwarded for have been generated by itself. Total packets sent Total broadcast packets Total forwarded packets Number of echo packet sent Count of IPX packets of type 20 Total received IPX packets of type 20 Number of matched IPX packets of type 20 Number of IPX packets of type 20 whose hop values are over 7 Number of sent IPX packets of type 20 Number of IPX packets of type 20 successfully sent Number of IPX packets of type 20 that have failed to be sent Count of RIP packets Count of received RIP request packets Count of reply RIP packets Number of sent RIP request packets generated by the router Number of received RIP reply packets Number of RIP reply packets generated by the router Number of routing information items in the routing table Count of SAP packets Number of received SAP GNS request packets Count of replies to the SAP GNS request packet Number of received SAP request packets Count of replies to the SAP request packet Count of SAP request packets generated by the router Number of received SAP reply packets Number of SAP reply messages generated by the router Number of service information table items in the service information table Count of forwarded packets Number of packets to be forwarded Number of packets successfully forwarded Number of packet that has not yet found the destination hop Number of packets that fail to be forwarded due to other causes Count of IPX ping packets
3-22
User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform Name of field 0 requests received 0 replies sent 0 requests sent 0 replies received 0 no route Total: 412 bytes received 576 bytes sent
Chapter 3
IPX Configuration Commands Meaning
Number of received IPX ping requests Count of replies to IPX ping requests Number of sent IPX ping requests Number of received IPX ping replies Number of IPX ping packets that fail to find routes Total traffic statistics at the interface Total received IPX packets at the interface Total sent IPX packets at the interface
3-23
Chapter 4
DLSw Configuration Commands
Chapter 4 DLSw Configuration Commands

DLSw configuration commands include: clear dlsw bridge-entry clear dlsw circuits dlsw bridge-group (Global configuration) dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration) dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration) dlsw disable dlsw local-peer tcp dlsw remote-peer tcp dlsw timer encapsulation sdlc idle-mark llc2 ack-delay-time llc2 ack-max llc2 local-window llc2 modulus llc2 N2 llc2 t1-time llc2 tbusy-time llc2 tpf-time llc2 trej-time llc2 txq-max sdlc address sdlc holdq sdlc k sdlc modulus sdlc N1 sdlc N2 sdlc partner sdlc poll-pause-timer sdlc saps sdlc simultaneous sdlc T1 sdlc T2 sdlc xid sdlc role sdlc vmac show dlsw bridge-entry show dlsw capabilities show dlsw circuits show dlsw peers show dlsw reachability debug dlsw debug sllc
4.1 clear dlsw bridge-entry

To clear the buffer memory information of DLSw bridge group entry, use the clear dlse bridge-entry command.
4-1
Chapter 4
clear dlsw bridge-entry
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The command will clear the buffer memory information of DLSw bridge group entry.
4.2 clear dlsw circuits

To clear DLSw circuits information, use the clear dlsw circuit command. clear dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ]
Syntax Description
circuit-id Circuit ID for a specific remote circuit, ranging 0 to 4294967295.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
A user can clear all the DLSw circuits information or the DLSw circuit information of a specific IP address.
4.3 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the bridge group of the Ethernet LANs, use the dlsw bridge-group command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link. dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number no dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number
Syntax Description
bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which DLSw will be attached, ranging 1 to 63, which is also valid at local.
Default
No default value.
Command Mode
4-2
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
To forward the messages of the specified bridge group to the remote end over TCP connection, you need to use this command to connect a local bridge group to DLSw. In other words, the messages of the local bridge group can be forwarded to the remote end through TCP channel. You can use the command several times to connect several bridge groups to DLSw, so that all of them can be forwarded through TCP channel.
4.4 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the Ethernet interface, use the dlsw bridge-group bridge-groupnumber command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link. dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number no dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number
Syntax Description
bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which the Ethernet interface will be linked, ranging 1 to 63.
Default
No Ethernet interface is added to the bridge group.
Usage Guideline
After adding an Ethernet interface to a bridge group, the LLC2 packets of the Ethernet interface can send to the remote peer entity through the corresponding TCP channel.
4.5 dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the synchronous interface, which encapsulated SDLC, use the dlsw bridge-group command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link. dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number no dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number
Syntax Description
bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which DLSw will be attached, ranging 1 to 63.
Default
No synchronous interface is added to the bridge group.
Usage Guideline
To allow the synchronous interface encapsulated with SDLC to participate in DLSw forwarding, you need to use this command to add SDLC interface to a bridge group. The bridge group on Ethernet interface takes part in the local forwarding, but the bridge
4-3
Chapter 4
group configured in the SDLC only takes part in DLSw forwarding, that is, all of the data on it will be forwarded to TCP channels.
4.6 dlsw disable

To disable DLSw without altering the configuration, use the dlsw disable command. Use the no form of this command to enable DLSw again. dlsw disable no dlsw disable
Default
Disable DLSw.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
After using this command, the system will release all the dynamic resources but reserve the existing configuration.
4.7 dlsw local-peer tcp

To create entities of the DLSw local peer, use the dlsw local-peer command. Use the no form of this command to remove the entities. dlsw local-peer tcp ip-address [cost cost ] [init-pacing-window init-window-size ] [ keepalive keepalive-interval] [ lf lf-size ] [ max-pacing-window max-window-size ] [ promiscuous ] no dlsw local-peer tcp ip-address
Syntax Description
ip-address local peer IP address. cost cost peer cost advertised to remote peers in the capability exchange, ranging 1 to 5. init-window-size size of the initial pacing window as defined in RFC 1795, ranging 1 to 2000 bytes. keepalive-interval default remote peer keepalive interval in seconds, ranging 0 to 1200 seconds. lf-size largest frame size for this local peer, which can be: 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454 or 17800 bytes. max-window-size maximum size of the pacing window as defined in RFC 1795, ranging 1 to 2000 bytes. promiscuous indicates that the remote router not configured beforehand is allowed to initiate connection and create dynamically peer entity. The end using the parameter
4-4
Chapter 4
doesnt need to configure the remote peer entity, instead waiting for the remote end to initiate connection.
Default
cost is 3. init-window-size is 40 bytes. keepalive-interval is 30 seconds. lf-size is 1500 bytes. max-window-size is 50 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Creating TCP channel is the first step for establishing DLSw connection. To create TCP channel, you have to firstly configure DLSw local peer entity in order to specify the IP address of the local end for establishing TCP connection, then the request sent by the remote end router can be received for establishing TCP connection. One router can only have one local peer entity.
4.8 dlsw remote-peer tcp

To create entities of the DLSw remote peer, use the dlsw remote-peer command. Use the no form of this command to remove the entities. dlsw remote-peer tcp ip-address [ cost cost ] [ keepalive keepalive-interval ] [ lf lfsize ] [ tcp-queue-max max-queue-length ] [ timeout seconds ] no dlsw remote-peer tcp ip-address
Syntax Description
ip-address IP address of the remote peer with which the router is to communicate. cost cost to reach this remote peer, ranging 1 to 5. keepalive-interval sets the keepalive interval for this remote peer, ranging 0 to 1200 seconds. lf-size largest frame size, in bytes, this local peer uses on a circuit to avoid segmented frames, which can be: 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454 or 17800 bytes. max-queue-length maximum output TCP queue size for this remote peer., ranging 50 to 2000 bytes. seconds retransmit time limit for TCP, ranging 5 to1200 seconds.
Default
cost is 3.
4-5
Chapter 4
keepalive-interval is 30 seconds. lf-size is 1500 bytes. max-queue-length is 200 bytes. seconds is 90 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
You need to configure the remote end peer entity to establish TCP channel after configuring the local peer entity. The router will continuously attempt to establish TCP connection with the remote end router. One router can configure several remote end peer entities. TCP channels can be connected with several remote end routers by configuring several remote end peer entities.
4.9 dlsw timer

To configure the parameters of DLSw timer, use the dlsw timer command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default parameters. dlsw timer [ connected-timeout seconds ] [ explorer-wait-timeout seconds ] [ local-pending-timeout seconds ] [ remote-pending-timeout seconds ] [ snacache-timeout seconds ] [ sna-explorer-timeout seconds ] no dlsw timer
Syntax Description
connected-timeout seconds length of time that the software waits for an explorer response before marking a resource unreachable, ranging 60 to 60000 seconds. explorer-wait-timeout seconds time to wait for all stations to respond to explorers., ranging 1 to 60000 seconds. local-pending-timeout seconds time to wait for local pending, ranging 1 to 60000 seconds. remote-pending-timeout seconds time to wait for the remote peer pending, ranging 1 to 60000 seconds. sna-cache-timeout seconds length of time that a SNA MAC/service access point (SAP) location cache entry exists before it is discarded (for local and remote caches), ranging 1 to 60000 seconds. sna-explorer-timeout seconds length of time that a SNA explorer exists before it is discarded, ranging 1 to 60000 seconds.
Default
connected-timeout seconds is 300 seconds. explorer-wait-timeout seconds is 10 seconds. local-pending-timeout seconds is 10 seconds.
4-6
Chapter 4
remote-pending-timeout seconds is 30 seconds. sna-cache-timeout seconds is 120 seconds. sna-explorer-timeout seconds is 30 seconds.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The values of various timers used when DLSw established virtual circuits can be modified by configuring DLSw protocol timer. It is recommended that subscribers do not modify or configure the parameters of DLSw timers in the common conditions.
4.10 encapsulation sdlc

To set SDLC as the link layer encapsulation protocol of synchronous interfaces, use the encapsulation sdlc command. encapsulation sdlc
Default
The link layer protocol encapsulated at synchronous interface is PPP
Command Mode
Synchronous interface configuration mode
Usage Guideline
SDLC is a link layer protocol relative to SNA. The working principle is very similar to HDLC. To allow DLSw to operate normally, the encapsulation protocol of synchronous interface link layer should be changed to SDLC. Notes that SDLC link protocol can not load IP protocol, so you should remove all of the commands related with IP, such as delete interface IP address, before encapsulating SDLC.
4.11 idle-mark
To assign the encoding mode for the idle time of synchronous interface, use the idlemark command. To restore the default encoding mode for the idle time of synchronous interface, use the no form of this command. idle-mark no idle-mark
Default
The synchronous interface adopts 7E encoding mode
4-7
Chapter 4
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The SDLC serial ports encapsulated by Quidway series of routers is identified with 7E during the idle time, but all of the serial ports on some SDLC equipment use high level working status 1 during the idle time. To improve the compatibility with the equipment, you need to change the idle time encoding mode of our routers. You may need to configure this command when connecting AS/400, that is, to change the idle time encoding mode in order to accelerate the polling rate of AS/400.
4.12 llc2 ack-delay-time

To set the amount of time the software waits for an acknowledgment before sending the next set of information frames, use the llc2 ack-delay-time command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 ack-delay-time mseconds no llc2 ack-delay-time
Syntax Description
mseconds Number of milliseconds the software allows incoming information frames to stay unacknowledged, ranging 1 to 60000ms.
Default
The local acknowledgement delay time of LLC2 is 100ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Upon receiving an information frame, each LLC2 station starts a timer. If the timer expires, an acknowledgment will be sent for the frame, even if the llc2 ack-max number of received frames has not been reached. Experiment with the value of the llc2 ackdelay-time command to determine the configuration that balances acknowledgment network overhead and quick response time (by receipt of timely acknowledgments).
4.13 llc2 ack-max

To control the maximum length of information frames the software can receive before it must send an acknowledgment, use the llc2 ack-max command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 ack-max length no llc2 ack-max
4-8
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
length maximum length of packets the software will receive before sending an acknowledgment, ranging 1 to 127 bytes.
Default
The length of the LLC2 premature acknowledgement window is 3 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
An LLC2-speaking station can send only a predetermined number of frames before it must wait for an acknowledgment from the receiver. If the receiver waits until receiving a large number of frames before acknowledging any of them, and then acknowledges them all at once, it reduces overhead on the network. For example, an acknowledgment for five frames can specify that all five have been received, as opposed to sending a separate acknowledgment for each frame. To keep network overhead low, make this parameter as large as possible.
4.14 llc2 local-window

To control the maximum length of information frames the software sends before it waits for an acknowledgment, use the llc2 local-window command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 local-window length no llc2 local-window
Syntax Description
length maximum length of packets that can be sent before the software must wait for an acknowledgment, ranging 1 to 127 bytes.
Default
The length of the local acknowledgement window of LLC2 is 7 bytes.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
An LLC2-speaking station can send only a predetermined number of frames before it must wait for an acknowledgment from the receiver. Set this number to the maximum value that can be supported by the stations with which the router communicates. Setting this value too large can cause frames to be lost, because the receiving station may not be able to receive all of them.
4-9
Chapter 4
4.15 llc2 modulus

To set the modulus used by LLC2, use the modulus command. To restore the default modulus used by LLC2, use the no form of the command. llc2 modulus n no llc2 modulus
Syntax Description
n the modulo value used by LLC2, which can be 8 or 128.
Default
The modulo value used by LLC2 is 128.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
LLC2 uses module mode to number the information message like X25 protocol. The modulo value is 8 or 128. Ethernet generally uses module 128.
4.16 llc2 N2
To control the amount of times the software retries sending unacknowledged frames or repolls remote busy stations, use the llc2 n2 command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 N2 retries no llc2 N2
Syntax Description
retries number of times the software retries operations, ranging 1 to 255.
Default
The retries time is 20 retries
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The number of times that an LLC2 station retries sending indicates the number of times it will redirect information frames when the receiver of that frame has not acknowledged it.
4-10
Chapter 4
4.17 llc2 t1-time

To control the amount of time the software will wait before redirecting unacknowledged information frames, use the llc2 t1-time command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 t1-time mseconds no llc2 t1-time
Syntax Description
mseconds number of ms the software waits before redirecting unacknowledged information frames, ranging 1 to 60000 ms.
Default
The local acknowledgement time of LLC2 is 200ms
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The local acknowledgement time of LLC2 indicates the maximum waiting time for the receivers answer after a LLC2 data packet is sent out.
4.18 llc2 tbusy-time

To control the amount of time the software waits until repolling a busy remote station, use the llc2 tbusy-time interface configuration command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 tbusy-time mseconds no llc2 tbusy-time
Syntax Description
mseconds Number of ms the software waits before repolling a busy remote station, ranging 1 to 60000 ms.
Default
BUSY status time for LLC2 is 300 ms
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
BUSY status time for LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits until repolling a busy remote station.
4-11
Chapter 4
4.19 llc2 tpf-time

To set the amount of time the software waits for a final response to a poll frame before redirecting the poll frame, use the llc2 tpf-time command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 tpf-time mseconds no llc2 tpf-time
Syntax Description
mseconds number of ms the software waits for a final response to a poll frame before redirecting the poll frame, ranging 1 to 60000ms.
Default
The P/F wait time of LLC2 is 5000 ms
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The P/F wait time of LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits for the correct information frame after sending the P frame.
4.20 llc2 trej-time

To control the amount of time the software waits for a correct frame after sending a reject command to the remote LLC2 station, use the llc2 trej-time command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 trej-time mseconds no llc2 trej-time
Syntax Description
mseconds number of ms the software waits for a redirect of a rejected frame before sending a reject command to the remote station, ranging 1 to 60000 ms.
Default
The rejected frame waiting time of LLC2 is 3200 ms
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The REJ status time of LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits for a correct frame after sending a reject command to the remote LLC2 station.
4-12
Chapter 4
4.21 llc2 txq-max

To control the queue length of messages sent of LLC2, use the ll2 txq-max command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. llc2 txq-max length no llc2 txq-max
Syntax Description
length queue length of messages sent of LLC2, ranging 20 to 200 bytes.
Default
The queue length of messages sent of LLC2 is 20 bytes
Command Mode
4.22 sdlc address

To assign a set of secondary stations attached to the serial link, use the sdlc address command. To remove an assigned secondary station, use the no form of this command. sdlc addr sdlc-address no sdlc addr sdlc-address
Syntax Description
sdlc-address hexadecimal number (base 16) indicating the address of the serial link.
Default
No secondary stations are assigned
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
SDLC protocol permits that several virtual circuits exist in a SDLC physics link. The one end connects to the primary station and the other end connects to the secondary station. You should specify the SDLC address of each virtual circuit so as to differentiate each virtual circuit. SDLC is unbalanced mode through sharer or SDLC switch. One primary equipment can be connected with several secondary equipment and the relationship is unique. However, connection can not be established between secondary equipment. It can ensure that communication normally operates in one group of SDLC equipment only if the addresses of secondary equipment are identified. This command is used to specify SDLC address for virtual circuit. The address is
4-13
Chapter 4
unique in a physical interface. The SDLC address configured on the synchronous interface is de facto the address of SDLC secondary station. SDLC addresses range from 0x01 to 0xFE. The SDLC address on a router is valid for one physical interface. That is, the SDLC addresses configured on the different interfaces can be same.
4.23 sdlc holdq

To control the maximum length of packets that can be held in a buffer before being transmitted to a remote SDLC station, use the sdlc holdq command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. sdlc holdq length no sdlc holdq
Syntax Description
length queue length of messages sent of SDLC, ranging 20 to 255 bytes.
Default
The queue length of messages sent of SDLC is 20 bytes
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command can configure the queue length of the messages sent of SDLC.
4.24 sdlc k
To set the window size in order to control the maximum number of information frames the software transmits before it must stop transmitting and wait for an acknowledgment from the receiving router, use the sdlc k command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. sdlc k length no sdlc k
Syntax Description
length length of the local acknowledgement window, ranging 1 to 7 bytes.
Default
The length of the local acknowledgement window of SDLC is 7 bytes
Command Mode
4-14
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
The local acknowledgement window of SDLC indicates the maximum number of information frames it will send before it must stop sending and wait for an acknowledgment.
4.25 sdlc modulus

To set the modulus used by SDLC, use the sdlc modulus command. To restore the default modulus used by SDLC, use the no form of the command. sdlc modulus n no sdlc modulus
Syntax Description
n modulo value used by SDLC, which can be 8 or 128.
Default
The modulo value used by SDLC is 8
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
SDLC uses module mode to number the information message like X25 protocol. The modulo value is 8 or 128. SDLC generally uses module 8.
4.26 sdlc n1
To control the maximum size of an incoming frame, use the sdlc n1 command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. sdlc n1 n no sdlc n1
Syntax Description
n number indicating bit size. Frames that exceed this size are rejected, ranging 1 to 17680 bytes
Default
The maximum frame length receivable of SDLC is 265 bytes
Command Mode
4-15
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
Maximum frame length of SDLC refers to byte number of maximum transmissible and receivable message, not including parity bit and stop bit. Generally, the length is 265 for some PU2.0 equipment and 521 for IBM AS/400.We often need to configure our equipment to be the same values as the connected SDLC equipment.
4.27 sdlc n2
To determine the number of retries that the software resends a frame before terminating the SDLC session, use the sdlc n2 command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command. sdlc n2 retries no sdlc n2
Syntax Description
retries number of retry attempts, ranging 1 to 255.
Default
The retransmission number of SDLC is 20 retries
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The retransmission number N2 of SDLC refers to the retransmission number before receiving no acknowledgement packet sent by the other part.
4.28 sdlc partner

To specify the peer with which an LLC session is established for the SDLC station, use the sdlc partner command. To cancel the configuration, use the no form of this command. sdlc partner mac-addr sdlc-addr no sdlc partner mac-addr sdlc-addr
Syntax Description
mac-addr the 48-bit Media Access Control (MAC) address. sdlc-address SDLC address of the serial device that will communicate with the host, ranging 1 to FE.
4-16
Chapter 4
Default
Synchronous interface without SDLC address
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command is used to specify a next-hop MAC address on the other end for a SDLC virtual address so as to provide the destination MAC address when transforming from SDLC to LLC2. When setting up DLSw, one SDLC address should be configured with one corresponding partner. The MAC address of partner shall be the MAC address of the remote end SNA equipment (physical addresses of such equipment as Ethernet and Token-Ring) or next-hop MAC address composed of SDLC.
4.29 sdlc poll-pause-timer

To control how long the software pauses between sending each poll frame to secondary stations on a single serial interface, use the sdlc poll-pause-timer command. To retrieve the default value, use the no form of this command. sdlc poll-pause-timer mseconds no sdlc poll-pause-timer
Syntax Description
mseconds number of ms that the software waits before sending the poll frame to a single serial interface, ranging 1 to 10000ms.
Default
The poll time interval of SDLC is 100ms
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Poll time interval of SDLC refers to wait time interval between two SDLC nodes polled by SDLC primary station.
4.30 sdlc saps

Configure SDLC to transform the SAP address of LLC2. The no form the command is used to restore the default value of the SAP address of LLC2. sdlc saps sdlc-addr lsap lsap no sdlc saps sdlc-addr
4-17
Chapter 4
Syntax Description
sdlc-addr SDLC address. lsap Virtual SAP address set up for the connective equipment of the interface. dsap SAP address of the specified DLSw opposite end equipment.
Default
Both lsap and lsap of LLC2 are 04.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
When transforming SDLC message to LLC2 message, it also need SAP address besides MAC address. This command is used to specify SAP address used when transforming llc2 for a SDLC byte. Generally, the SAP address used by SNA protocol is 0x04, 0x08 or 0x0C.
4.31 sdlc simultaneous

To enable an interface configured as a primary SDLC station to operate in simultaneous mode, use the sdlc simultaneous command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. sdlc simultaneous no sdlc simultaneous
Default
By default, the SDLC driver supports alternative mode.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Use this command to enable the simultaneous interface encapsulated with SDLC to operate in alternate mode. That is to say, the simultaneous mode enables the interface configured as a primary SDLC station to send data to a secondary station, even when it is receiving data from another secondary station.
4.32 sdlc T1
To control the amount of time the software waits for a primary station acknowledgment frame or sequence of frames, use the sdlc t1 command. To revert to the default value, use the no form of this command.
4-18
Chapter 4
sdlc t1 mseconds no sdlc t1
Syntax Description
mseconds number of ms that the software waits for an acknowledgment packet from primary station, ranging 1 to 60000ms.
Default
Configure the acknowledgement wait time T1 of SDLC Primary Station to be 3000 ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Acknowledgement wait time T2 of secondary station refers to the duration that the secondary station waits for acknowledgement from secondary station after sending information frame.
4.33 sdlc T2
To control the amount of time the software waits for a secondary station acknowledgment frame or sequence of frames, use the sdlc t2 command. To revert to the default value, use the no form of this command. sdlc t2 mseconds no sdlc t2
Syntax Description
mseconds Number of ms that the software waits for an acknowledgment packet from primary station, ranging 1 to 60000ms.
Default
The acknowledgement wait time of SDLC secondary station T2 is 500ms.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Acknowledgement wait time T3 of secondary station refers to the duration that the primary station waits for acknowledgement from primary station after sending information frame.
4-19
Chapter 4
4.34 sdlc xid

To specify an exchange ID (XID) value appropriate for the designated SDLC station associated with this serial interface, use the sdlc xid command. To disable XID processing for this address, use the no form of this command. sdlc xid sdlc-address xid-number no sdlc xid sdlc-address
Syntax Description
sdlc-address address of the SDLC station associated with this interface. xid-number XID the software will use to respond to XID requests the router receives, whose first 12bit is network number and last 24bit is node number.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
XID is an identification of the equipment identity in the SNA world. Generally, there are two kinds of equipment - PU2.0 and PU2.1.PU2.1 equipment itself is configured with XID, so it can show the identities of each other by exchanging XID; while PU2.0 equipment doesnt exchange XID, thus there is no XID. Therefore, the equipment of PU2.1 type doesnt need to be configured with this command, while PU2.0 equipment needs it to specify one XID.
4.35 sdlc role

To establish the router to be either a primary or secondary SDLC station, use the sdlc role command. To cancel the designation, use the no form of this command. sdlc role { primary | secondary } no sdlc role
Syntax Description
primary establishes the router as a primary station. secondary establishes the router as a secondary station.
Default
No default role is assigned
Command Mode
4-20
Chapter 4
Usage Guideline
SDLC is a link layer protocol in the unbalanced mode. In another words, the connected equipment on the both ends does not have unequal priority. One of the parts is the primary station that plays the leading role and controls the whole connection process and its role is primary. The other part is the secondary station that is controlled in a passive mode and its role is secondary. Subscribers need to configure role for the interface encapsulated with SDLC protocol. SDLC role shall be configured according to the role of SDLC equipment connecting with this router. If SDLC equipment connecting with the interface is primary, the interface should be set to secondary. If the connected equipment is secondary, the interface should be set to primary. Generally, the central IBM mainframes are primary, and terminal equipment are secondary, such as Unix host and ATM machine.
4.36 sdlc vmac

To configure a MAC address for the serial interface, use the sdlc vmac command. To disable the configuration, use the no form of this command. sdlc vmac mac-address no sdlc vmac
Syntax Description
mac-addres 48-bit MAC address of the host.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
This command must be configured if you plan to configure DLSw. The last byte of the address must be 00.
4.37 show dlsw bridge-entry

To display the bridge group information, use the show dlsw bridge-entry command. show dlsw bridge-entry
Command Mode
4-21
Chapter 4
Example
Quidway# show dlsw bridge-engry
mac_entry 0000.e81c.b6bf Port Ethernet0 group 1 hashIndex 79
4.38 show dlsw capabilities

To display the performance exchange information of DLSw, use the show dlsw capabilities command. show dlsw capabilities [ local ] [ ip-address ]
Syntax Description
local show local information for performance exchange. ip-address show performance exchange information with specified IP address.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
The output information of this command is helpful for the user to conduct IPX flow statistics and fault diagnosis.
Example
Quidway# show dlsw capabilities
DLSw: Capabilities for peer 14.0.0.1 Vendor ID (OUI) : 00000c Version number : 01 Release number : 00 Init Pacing Window : 40 Num of TCP sessions : 01 Mac address exclusive : no NetBIOS Name exclusive : no Mac address List : none NetBIOS Name List : none Configured IP address : 14.0.0.1 Version string : VRP (tm) 3640 series software, Version 1.3.1, RELEASE(1) Copyright (c) 1997-2001 HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD.
Quidway# show dlsw capabilities local
DLSw: Capabilities for peer 12.0.0.1 Vendor ID (OUI): '00e0fc' (HuaWei) Version number: 1 Release number: 0 Init Pacing Window: 40 Num of TCP sessions: 1 Mac address exclusive: no NetBIOS Name exclusive: no Mac address List: none NetBIOS Name List: none Configured IP address: 12.0.0.1 Version string: VRP (tm) 2630 series software, Version 1.3.1, RELEASE(1) Copyright (c) 1997-2001 HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD.
4-22
Chapter 4
4.39 show dlsw circuits

To display the virtual circuit information of DLSw, use the show dlsw circuits command. show dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ] [ detail ]
Syntax Description
circuit-id displays the virtual circuit number of DLSw, ranging 0 to 4294967295. detail displays the ordinary detailed information of the virtual circuit.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Example
Quidway# show dlsw circuits
Correlator 0x00a2000a local addr(lsap) 0000.1738.6dfd(04) remote addr(rsap) 0000.1722.3435(04) state CONNECTED
Quidway# show dlsw circuits detail
Correlator local addr(lsap) remote addr(rsap) state 0x00a2000a 0000.1738.6dfd(04) 0000.1722.3435(04) CONNECTED Port: Ethernet0 Peer: 14.0.0.1 Direction: 1 LifeTime: 14:19:49 FC Tx CW:40, PT:40; Rx CW:40, GT:40; FCI:0; Delay:0; Op:0 Local-Ack Vs:0, Vr:0, VaSend:0, VaRecv:0, CW-Tx:0, CW-Rx:0 DLC_STATE: 3, Vt:0 Wack-len:0, Send-len:0 SSP-tx: 0 SSP-rx: 0 I-frame: tx 0 rx 0 dx 0
4.40 show dlsw peers

To display the remote end peer entity information, use the show dlsw peers command. show dlsw peers [ ip-address ]
Syntax Description
ip-address displays the remote end peer entity information with certain IP address.
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
4-23
Chapter 4
Example
Quidway# show dlsw peers
TCP TCP TCP Peers: 11.0.0.1 13.0.0.1 14.0.0.1 State DISCONNECT DISCONNECT CONNECT 0 0 1897 pkts_rx pkts_tx 0 0 0 0 1899 0 drops uptime 14:26:22
4.41 show dlsw reachability

To display the information of MAC buffers, use the show dlsw reachablity command. show dlsw reachability
Command Mode
Usage Guideline
Example
Quidway# show dlsw reachability
DLSw Local MAC address reachability cache list Mac addr status Loc. Port 0000.3817.fd6d FOUND LOCAL Ethernet0 DLSw Remote MAC address reachability cache list Mac addr status Loc. Peer 0000.2217.3534 FOUND REMOTE 14.0.0.1
4.42 debug dlsw

Enable the debugging information of DLSw, use the debug dlsw command. debug dlsw [ circuit | core |event | packet | peers ]
Syntax Description
circuit enables the DLSw circuit, open the debugging. core enables the DLSw status machine debugging . event enables the DLSw abnormal events debugging. packet enables the DLSw messages debugging. peers enables the DLSw peer entity debugging.
Command Mode
4-24
Chapter 4
4.43 debug sllc

Enable the information debugging of SDLC. debug dlsw [ event | event ]
Syntax Description
event enables the SDLC events debugging. event enables the SDLC events debugging .
Command Mode
4-25
How Are We Doing

Let us share your comments with respect to the contents, formats and wording of this manual. Your feedback can be of great value in helping us improve our document. Please use a copy of these two pages for your comments, and fax to: +86-755-6540035 Documentation Development Department. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:
Excellent Ease of Use Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Structure Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction Good Fair Poor
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document: Improve the overview/introduction Improve the table of contents Improve the organization structure Include more figures Add more examples Add more details Make it more brief/concise Add more step-by-step procedures Add more troubleshooting info. Make it less technical Add more reference aids Improve the index
Please provide details for the suggested improvement:
3. What did you like most about this document?
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.
5. It is highly appreciated for any specific mistakes you have found (this page may be sent to us separately).
Mistake Suggested Correction Page & Line No.
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following: Name:______________________ Tel: _____________________________ Company:________________________________ Date:________________ Address:_______________________________________________________

31010794-VRP1.5 Command Reference Volume 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

31010794-VRP1.5 Command Reference Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HUAWEI

VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1

VRP User Manual Command Reference

Product Version V200R001 BOM 31010794

Copyright 2001 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Manual

Conventions Used in the Document

[Menu 1/Menu 2/Menu 3]

Action Click Double Click Drag

VRP User Manual - Command Reference Volume 1 01 Fundamental Configuration (FC)

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

Chapter 1 EXEC Interface Commands

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

Quidway(config-if-ethernet0)# exit Quidway(config)#

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

1.14 show history

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

Chapter 2 System Management Commands

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.1.3 download config

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.1.8 show configfile

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

Quidway(config)# show configfile

2.1.9 show running-config

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.1.10 show startup-config

2.2 FTP Server Configuration Commands

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.2.1 ftp-server config-name

2.2.2 ftp-server enable

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.2.3 ftp-server system-name

2.2.4 ftp-server timeout

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.2.5 show ftp-server

2.3 Basic System Management Commands

2.3.1 clock set

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

clock set hour:minute:second day month year

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.3.5 show clock

User Manual Command Reference (Volume 1) Versatile Routing Platform

2.3.6 show hostname

2.3.7 show queueing